Ricoh SP 330SFN Printer black and white Guide

Ricoh SP 330SFN Printer black and white Guide
User’s Guide
Guide to the Machine
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Printing Documents
Copying Originals
Scanning Originals
Sending and Receiving a Fax
Configuring the Machine Using the Control
Panel
Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Maintaining the Machine
Troubleshooting
Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Appendix
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Find Information about Operations and Troubleshooting...............................................................12
Operating Manual (Printed)....................................................................................................................... 12
Operating Manual (Digital Format)........................................................................................................... 12
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................14
Introduction...................................................................................................................................................14
Symbols Used in This Manual.....................................................................................................................14
Model-Specific Information........................................................................................................................ 14
Disclaimer..................................................................................................................................................... 15
Notes............................................................................................................................................................ 15
Note to Administrator.................................................................................................................................. 16
List of Option................................................................................................................................................ 16
About IP Address......................................................................................................................................... 17
1. Guide to the Machine
Guide to Components......................................................................................................................................19
Exterior..........................................................................................................................................................19
Interior...........................................................................................................................................................21
Control Panel (When Using the Touch Panel Model)...............................................................................22
Control Panel (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)..................................................................24
Installing Option............................................................................................................................................... 26
Attaching Paper Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................... 26
Installing the Wireless LAN option............................................................................................................. 27
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..................................................... 30
Displaying the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................... 30
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................. 30
Customizing the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model).................................................... 33
How to Customize the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)......................................33
Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items (When Using the Touch Panel Model)....... 33
Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)...............34
Deleting an Icon on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)....................................34
Registering Frequently Used Functions (When Using the Touch Panel Model).......................................... 35
Registering Functions in a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel Model).................................... 35
Recalling a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel Model)............................................................ 36
Deleting a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..............................................................37
1
Displaying Frequently Used Modes Preferentially (When Using the Touch Panel Model)....................... 38
Changing Operation Modes (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model).............................................39
Multi-access......................................................................................................................................................40
About Operation Tools.................................................................................................................................... 42
Assigning a Setting to the Shortcut Key (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)............................ 44
Assigning a Setting Using the Control Panel (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)................44
Assigning a Setting Using Web Image Monitor (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)..........44
Accessing the Function Assigned to the Shortcut Key (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)......
.......................................................................................................................................................................45
Entering Characters (When Using the Touch Panel Model).........................................................................46
Character Entry Display (When Using the Touch Panel Model)............................................................. 46
Available Characters (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..................................................................47
Entering Text (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................................................ 47
Entering Characters (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)............................................................49
Using Application for Smart Devices.............................................................................................................. 50
Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using NFC.............................................................................. 52
Writing the Machine's Information to NFC with a Smart Device.............................................................52
Using the Application on a Smart Device by Using NFC.........................................................................53
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Workflow for Loading Paper and Configuring Paper Sizes and Types...................................................... 55
Loading Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 56
Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2................................................................................................................ 56
Loading Paper into Bypass Tray................................................................................................................. 60
Loading Envelopes.......................................................................................................................................61
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Control Panel.................................................................64
Specifying the Paper Type.......................................................................................................................... 64
Specifying the Standard Paper Size...........................................................................................................66
Specifying a Custom Paper Size................................................................................................................ 67
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Smart Organizing Monitor.................................................69
Specifying a Custom Paper Size................................................................................................................ 70
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Web Image Monitor........................................................... 71
Specifying a Custom Paper Size................................................................................................................ 71
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer Driver.................................................................. 72
2
When Using Windows................................................................................................................................ 72
When Using OS X........................................................................................................................................73
Supported Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 74
Specifications of Paper Types..................................................................................................................... 77
Non-Recommended Paper Types.............................................................................................................. 84
Paper Storage.............................................................................................................................................. 85
Print Area...................................................................................................................................................... 85
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................89
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass...................................................................................................89
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder....................................................................................... 89
About Originals............................................................................................................................................90
3. Printing Documents
What You Can Do with the Printer Function...................................................................................................93
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer.................................................................................................... 94
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication............................................................................................. 94
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled............................................................................................... 94
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box.............................................................................................96
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the [Start] Menu................................................... 96
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application.......................................................... 96
Basic Operation of Printing............................................................................................................................. 98
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs....................................................................................................................... 99
Canceling a Print Job................................................................................................................................ 100
Printing Confidential Documents...................................................................................................................102
Storing a Locked Print file......................................................................................................................... 102
Printing a Locked Print file......................................................................................................................... 103
Deleting a Locked Print file....................................................................................................................... 105
Printing with Mopria...................................................................................................................................... 107
Using Various Print Functions........................................................................................................................ 108
Print Quality Functions...............................................................................................................................108
Print Output Functions................................................................................................................................109
4. Copying Originals
What You Can Do with the Copier Function............................................................................................... 111
Copier Mode Screen.................................................................................................................................... 112
3
Basic Operation of Copying.........................................................................................................................114
Canceling a Copy..................................................................................................................................... 116
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies......................................................................................................... 118
Specifying Reduce/Enlarge..................................................................................................................... 119
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing....................................................121
Specifying Combined and 2-sided Copies.............................................................................................124
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing............................................................126
Duplex Copying Using the ADF............................................................................................................... 127
Duplex Copying Manually Using the Exposure Glass...........................................................................129
Copying an ID Card......................................................................................................................................131
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying..........................................................................................................135
Adjusting Image Density........................................................................................................................... 135
Selecting the Document Type According to Original.............................................................................136
5. Scanning Originals
What You Can Do with the Scanner Function.............................................................................................139
Scanner Mode Screen.................................................................................................................................. 140
Registering Scan Destinations.......................................................................................................................142
Modifying Scan Destinations....................................................................................................................148
Deleting Scan Destinations....................................................................................................................... 148
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder...............................................................................................................150
Printing the Check Sheet.......................................................................................................................150
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name............................................................................. 151
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer.......................................................................................... 153
Specifying Access Privileges for the Created Shared Folder............................................................ 155
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book........................................................... 155
Send Scanned Files to a Shared Folder..............................................................................................156
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail............................................................................................................... 160
Configuring SMTP and DNS Settings..................................................................................................160
Registering Destination E-mail Addresses to the Address Book........................................................ 161
Sending Scanned Files by E-mail........................................................................................................ 161
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP....................................................................................................................165
Configuring FTP Server Settings...........................................................................................................165
Sending Scanned Files to an FTP Server.............................................................................................165
4
Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend] (When Using the Touch Panel Model)........................169
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device................................................ 170
Scanning from Smart Organizing Monitor..................................................................................................175
Scanner Settings You Can Configure for Smart Organizing Monitor.................................................. 176
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning........................................................................................................ 179
Using TWAIN scanner.............................................................................................................................. 179
TWAIN scanning.......................................................................................................................................179
Settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box........................................................................... 180
Basic Operation for WIA Scanning............................................................................................................. 182
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning...............................................................................................................183
Installing the ICA Driver............................................................................................................................ 183
Using ICA Scanner....................................................................................................................................183
ICA Scanning.............................................................................................................................................183
Settings you can configure in the ICA dialog box.................................................................................. 184
About SANE Scanning..................................................................................................................................186
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning........................................................................................................ 187
Specifying the Scanning Size According to the Size of the Original....................................................187
Adjusting Image Density........................................................................................................................... 188
Specifying Resolution................................................................................................................................ 190
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
What You Can Do with the Fax Function.....................................................................................................193
Fax Setting Workflows.................................................................................................................................. 194
Fax Mode Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 196
Registering Fax Destinations......................................................................................................................... 198
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel............................................................................ 198
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor...................................................................... 200
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination.................................................................................202
Sending a Fax................................................................................................................................................ 203
Selecting Transmission Mode...................................................................................................................203
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax......................................................................................................... 204
Canceling a Transmission......................................................................................................................... 207
Specifying the Fax Destination................................................................................................................. 209
Useful Sending Functions.......................................................................................................................... 212
5
Specifying Scan Settings for Faxing........................................................................................................ 215
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)..................................................................................217
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer........................................................................... 217
Configuring Transmission Settings............................................................................................................219
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book................................................................................................. 219
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet........................................................................................................................ 222
Receiving a Fax..............................................................................................................................................223
Selecting Reception Mode....................................................................................................................... 223
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory................................................................................................ 227
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders...............................................................................231
Lists/Reports Related to Fax......................................................................................................................... 234
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Basic Operation.............................................................................................................................................235
Menu Chart.................................................................................................................................................... 237
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)...............................................................239
Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)............................................................ 244
Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model).................................................................... 247
Address Book Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..................................................................255
System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..............................................................................256
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................................262
Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................................................266
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)......................................................... 271
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model).................................................................... 279
Printing the Configuration Page (When Using the Touch Panel Model)...............................................279
Configuration Page................................................................................................................................... 279
Types of Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model).............................................................. 280
Network Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)...........................................................................282
@Remote (When Using the Touch Panel Model)........................................................................................286
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)..................................................287
Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)............................................... 292
System Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model).................................................................294
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)...................................................299
Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model).......................................................... 304
6
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)............................................ 310
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)........................................................316
Printing the Configuration Page (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)..................................316
Configuration Page................................................................................................................................... 316
Types of Lists/Reports (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)................................................. 317
Network Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)..............................................................319
Network Wizard (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)..............................................................323
@Remote (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)...........................................................................324
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Available Setting Functions Using Web Image Monitor and Smart Organizing Monitor...................... 327
Using Web Image Monitor...........................................................................................................................329
Displaying Top Page..................................................................................................................................... 330
Changing the Interface Language........................................................................................................... 331
Checking the System Information................................................................................................................. 332
Status Tab...................................................................................................................................................332
Counter Tab............................................................................................................................................... 333
Configuring the System Settings................................................................................................................... 335
Sound Volume Adjustment Tab................................................................................................................ 335
Tray Paper Settings Tab............................................................................................................................ 335
Copier Tab................................................................................................................................................. 338
Fax Tab (Only When Using the Touch Panel Model)............................................................................ 338
Priority Tray Tab.........................................................................................................................................341
Toner Management Tab........................................................................................................................... 341
Interface Tab..............................................................................................................................................342
Shortcut to Function Tab (Only When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model).................................... 343
Registering Destinations................................................................................................................................ 344
Registering Fax Special Senders (Only When Using the Touch Panel Model)........................................345
Configuring the Network Settings................................................................................................................ 346
Network Status Tab...................................................................................................................................346
IPv6 Configuration Tab.............................................................................................................................347
Network Application Tab......................................................................................................................... 347
DNS Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 348
Auto E-mail Notification Tab.................................................................................................................... 349
7
SNMP Tab................................................................................................................................................. 350
SMTP Tab...................................................................................................................................................351
POP3 Tab...................................................................................................................................................352
Wireless Tab.............................................................................................................................................. 352
Google Cloud Tab.................................................................................................................................... 354
Airprint Tab................................................................................................................................................ 354
Certificate Tab........................................................................................................................................... 355
Configuring the IPsec Settings.......................................................................................................................358
IPsec Global Settings Tab.........................................................................................................................358
IPsec Policy List Tab................................................................................................................................... 358
Printing Lists/Reports..................................................................................................................................... 362
Configuring the Administrator Settings.........................................................................................................363
Administrator Tab...................................................................................................................................... 363
Reset Settings Tab......................................................................................................................................363
Backup Setting Tab................................................................................................................................... 364
Restore Setting Tab....................................................................................................................................365
Set Date/Time Tab....................................................................................................................................365
Energy Saver Mode Tab.......................................................................................................................... 366
PCL6 Mode................................................................................................................................................367
Using Smart Organizing Monitor.................................................................................................................368
Displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor Dialog................................................................................. 368
Checking the Status Information...............................................................................................................368
Configuring the Machine Settings............................................................................................................369
Printing the Configuration Page................................................................................................................371
Configuration Page................................................................................................................................... 371
Types of Lists/Reports............................................................................................................................... 372
9. Maintaining the Machine
Replacing the Print Cartridge........................................................................................................................375
Cautions When Cleaning..............................................................................................................................379
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller....................................................................................... 380
Cleaning the Exposure Glass........................................................................................................................382
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder...........................................................................................................383
Moving and Transporting the Machine....................................................................................................... 384
8
Disposal......................................................................................................................................................385
Where to Inquire....................................................................................................................................... 385
10. Troubleshooting
Error and Status Messages on the Screen...................................................................................................387
Panel Indicator............................................................................................................................................... 401
Error and Status Messages Appear on Smart Organizing Monitor..........................................................402
Removing Paper Jams....................................................................................................................................404
Removing Printing Jams.............................................................................................................................405
Removing Scanning Jams......................................................................................................................... 414
When You Cannot Print Test Page............................................................................................................... 416
Paper Feed Problems.....................................................................................................................................417
Print Quality Problems................................................................................................................................... 420
Checking the Condition of the Machine..................................................................................................420
Checking the Printer Driver Settings......................................................................................................... 421
Printer Problems............................................................................................................................................. 423
When You Cannot Print Properly............................................................................................................. 423
When You Cannot Print Clearly...............................................................................................................426
When Paper Is Not Fed or Ejected Properly...........................................................................................428
Other Printing Problems............................................................................................................................ 428
Copier Problems............................................................................................................................................ 429
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies.................................................................................................. 429
When You Cannot Make Copies as Wanted.........................................................................................430
Scanner Problems.......................................................................................................................................... 431
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File............................................................... 431
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected............................................................................................. 431
Fax Problems (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................................................. 432
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted (When Using the Touch Panel Model).
.................................................................................................................................................................... 432
When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-mail (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..................435
Error Code (When Using the Touch Panel Model)................................................................................ 436
Common Problems.........................................................................................................................................439
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Installing the Printer Driver............................................................................................................................ 443
9
Installing Smart Organizing Monitor........................................................................................................... 444
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network........................................................................................... 445
Using a USB Cable................................................................................................................................... 445
Using an Ethernet Cable........................................................................................................................... 445
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network........................................................................................449
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard................................................................................................................. 449
Using the WPS Button............................................................................................................................... 451
Using a PIN Code..................................................................................................................................... 453
12. Appendix
Transmission Using IPsec...............................................................................................................................457
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec.................................................................................................. 457
Security Association.................................................................................................................................. 458
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow......................................................................... 459
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings........................................................................................460
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer............................................................................................. 460
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel..........................................................................462
Notes About the Toner.................................................................................................................................. 464
Specifications of the Machine...................................................................................................................... 465
General Function Specifications.............................................................................................................. 465
Printer Function Specifications.................................................................................................................. 467
Copier Function Specifications.................................................................................................................468
Scanner Function Specifications...............................................................................................................468
Fax Function Specifications (When Using the Touch Panel Model)..................................................... 469
Paper Feed Unit PB1130..........................................................................................................................470
Consumables..................................................................................................................................................471
Print Cartridge............................................................................................................................................471
Information for This Machine........................................................................................................................ 472
User Information on Electrical & Electronic Equipment
(mainly Europe and Asia)..........472
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)......................................... 473
Environmental Advice for Users
Notice To NFC Users
(mainly Europe)............................................................... 473
(mainly Europe)................................................................................474
NOTES TO USERS REGARDING FACSIMILE UNIT (NEW ZEALAND)............................................. 474
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)..........................................................475
10
Notes to users in the United States of America....................................................................................... 475
Notes to Canadian Users regarding Facsimile Unit............................................................................... 477
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens.................................................................................477
ENERGY STAR Program........................................................................................................................... 478
Saving Energy............................................................................................................................................478
Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................481
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................485
11
How to Find Information about Operations
and Troubleshooting
You can find support information about operating the machine and troubleshooting in the Operating
Manual (printed), Operating Manual (digital format), and Help (online).
Operating Manual (Printed)
The following manuals are provided with this machine.
Safety Information
This manual explains the safety precautions that should be followed when using the machine. Be
sure to read this manual before using the machine.
Setup Guide
This manual explains how to set up the machine. It also explains how to remove the machine from
the packaging and how to connect it to a computer.
Operating Manual (Digital Format)
Operating manuals can be viewed from Ricoh's website or from the provided CD-ROM.
Viewing from a web browser
Access the Internet from a web browser.
Confirm that the computer or the machine is connected to the network.
Download the operating manuals from http://www.ricoh.com/.
Viewing from the provided CD-ROM
Operating manuals can also be viewed from the provided CD-ROM.
• When using Windows
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click [Read Manual] and follow the instructions on the screen.
The PDF file manual opens.
• When using OS X
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click Manuals.htm file, located on the CD-ROM root directory.
3. Select the language.
4. Click [Read PDF manuals].
12
5. Click the manual you want to refer to.
The PDF file manual opens.
13
How to Read This Manual
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Symbols Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
DYG231
14
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 120–127 V
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
The illustrations of the control panel and the machine in this manual are for the touch panel model.
15
Note to Administrator
Password
Certain configurations of this machine can be password-protected to prevent unauthorized modifications
by others. We strongly recommend you to create your own password immediately.
The following are the operations that can be password-protected:
When Using the Touch Panel Model
• Entering the [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Administrator Tools] menu using the
control panel
You can access these menus without a password by factory default.
The setting for creating a password can be found in [Administrator Tools].
• Configuring the machine using Web Image Monitor
You can configure the machine using Web Image Monitor without a password by factory
default. The setting for creating a password can be found in [Administrator Settings].
For details about creating passwords, see page 363 "Configuring the Administrator Settings".
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
• Entering the [Network Settings], [Network Wizard], or [Admin. Tools] menu using the control
panel
You can access these menus without a password by factory default.
The setting for creating a password can be found in [Admin. Tools].
• Configuring the machine using Web Image Monitor
You can configure the machine using Web Image Monitor without a password by factory
default. The setting for creating a password can be found in [Administrator Settings].
For details about creating passwords, see page 363 "Configuring the Administrator Settings".
List of Option
Option List
Referred to as
Paper Feed Unit PB1130
Paper feed unit
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16
Wireless LAN option
• If Paper feed unit is attached, "Tray 2" appears on the machine's control panel.
16
About IP Address
In this manual, "IP address" covers both IPv4 and IPv6 environments. Read the instructions that are
relevant to the environment you are using.
17
18
1. Guide to the Machine
This chapter describes preparations for using the machine and its operating instructions.
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names of the various parts on the front and rear side of the machine and
outlines their functions.
Exterior
1
3
2
4
20
19
18
17
16
12
15
12
5
6
7
8
9
14
No.
13
Name
12 11 10
DYG226
Description
1
Control Panel
Contains a screen and keys for machine control.
2
ADF Cover
Open this cover to remove originals jammed in the ADF.
19
1. Guide to the Machine
No.
20
Name
Description
3
Input Tray for the ADF
Place stacks of originals here. They will feed in
automatically. This tray can hold up to 35 sheets of
plain paper.
4
Auto Document Feeder
(Exposure Glass Cover)
The ADF is integrated with the exposure glass cover.
Open this cover to place originals on the exposure
glass.
5
External Telephone Connector
(only the Touch Panel Model)
For connecting an external telephone.
6
G3 (analog) Line Interface
Connector (only the Touch Panel
Model)
For connecting a telephone line.
7
USB Port for wireless LAN option Insert the wireless LAN option to connect with a wireless
LAN when the machine's power is turned off.
8
USB Port
For connecting the machine to a computer using a USB
cable.
9
Ethernet Port
For connecting the machine to the network using a
network interface cable.
10
Tray 1 Rear Cover
This cover opens when you load paper longer than A4
in Tray 1.
11
Rear Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper or to lower
the levers inside before printing on envelopes.
12
Side Fence
Adjust this fence to the paper size.
13
Bypass Tray
This tray can hold up to 50 sheets of plain paper.
14
Tray 1
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.
15
End Fence
Adjust this fence to the paper size.
16
Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the print cartridge or remove
jammed paper.
17
USB Flash Disk Port
Insert a USB flash memory device to store scanned files
using the Scan to USB function.
18
Standard Tray
Printed paper is output here. Up to 50 sheets of plain
paper can be stacked here.
Guide to Components
No.
Name
Description
19
Stop Fence
Raise this fence to prevent paper from falling off.
20
Exposure Glass
Place originals here sheet by sheet.
• If it is difficult to take printed paper out of the output tray, you can lift the control panel and make it
easier to take the printed paper out.
DYG227
Interior
2
2
1
DYG229
No.
1
Name
Print Cartridge
Description
A replacement consumable that is required to make prints on
paper. It needs to be replaced when the alert indicator flashes. For
details about replacing the cartridge, see page 375 "Replacing
the Print Cartridge".
21
1. Guide to the Machine
No.
2
Name
Description
Envelope Levers
Lower these levers when copying or printing on envelopes. Pull up
these levers back when copying or printing on paper other than
envelopes.
Control Panel (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
• When you push the [Power] key, wait at least a second after the indicator has lit up or gone out.
1
2
7
No.
1
Name
NFC
8
3
4
9
5
10
6
DYG317
Description
Allows you to connect a smart device to the machine when you
touch NFC on a smart device using the application corresponding
to the machine.
For details, see page 50 "Using Application for Smart Devices".
22
2
[Home] key
Press to display the [Home] screen. For details, see page 30
"How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
3
Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, and
shortcuts that allow you to navigate the screens of the various
functions and provide you with information about operation status
and other messages.
Guide to Components
No.
Name
4
Number keys
5
[Clear/Stop] key
Description
Use to enter the numbers for copies, fax numbers and data for the
selected function.
• While the machine is processing a job: press to cancel the
current job.
• While configuring the machine settings: press to cancel the
current setting and return to standby mode.
• While in standby mode: press to cancel temporary settings
such as image density or resolution.
6
[Power] key
Press to turn the main power on or off.
This indicator lights up when the machine is turned on.
To turn off the machine, press and hold down this key for at least
three seconds.
If you press this key for less than 3 seconds, the machine switches
to Energy Saver mode. To recover Energy Saver mode, press this
key again for less than 3 seconds.
7
Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax functions. Lights up when received
faxes that have not been printed out exist in the machine's
memory.
8
Data In indicator
This indicator flashes when the machine receives print data from a
host device.
This indicator lights up when there is a Locked Print file stored in
the machine.
9
Alert indicator
Flashes when the toner is nearly empty, or lights up when the
machine runs out of toner or a machine error occurs.
When an alert is issued, check the messages on the screen. For
details about the messages that appear on the screen, see
page 387 "Error and Status Messages on the Screen".
10
[Start] key
Press to scan or copy or start sending a fax.
• The backlight of the screen is turned off when the machine is in Energy Saver mode.
• When the machine is processing a job, you cannot display the menu for configuring the machine.
You can confirm the machine's status by checking messages on the screen. If you see messages
such as "Printing...", "Copying...", or "Processing...", wait until the current job is finished.
23
1. Guide to the Machine
Control Panel (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SN only.
• When you push the [Power] key, wait at least a second after the indicator has lit up or gone out.
1
2 3 4
12 13 14
No.
24
5
6
7
15
16
17
Name
8
18
9
19
10
11
20
DYG318
Description
1
[Image Quality] key
Press to select the scan quality for the current job.
2
[Shortcut to Func.] key
Press to use the function pre-assigned to this key.
3
[Density] key
Press to adjust the image density for the current job.
4
[Copy] key
Press to switch the machine to copier mode.
5
[Scanner] key
Press to switch the machine to scanner mode.
6
Screen
Displays the current status and messages.
7
Scroll Keys
Press to move the cursor in the direction indicated by the key.
8
Number Keys
Press to enter numerical values when specifying settings such as
copy quantities or to enter letters when specifying names.
9
[Clear/Stop] key
Press to cancel or stop print jobs, document copying, scanning,
and other actions in progress.
10
[User Tools] key
Press to display the menu for configuring the machine's system
settings.
Guide to Components
No.
11
Name
[Power] key
Description
Press to turn the main power on or off.
This indicator lights up when the machine is turned on.
To turn off the machine, press and hold down this key for at least
three seconds.
If you press this key for less than 3 seconds, the machine switches
to Energy Saver mode. To recover Energy Saver mode, press this
key again for less than 3 seconds.
12
[Duplex] key
Press to print on both sides of paper.
13
[Wi-Fi Direct] key
Pressing this key enables Wi-Fi while Wi-Fi is disabled and the
wireless LAN option is installed to the USB port on the back of the
machine. Press this key while Wi-Fi is enabled to activate or
deactivate the Wi-Fi Direct function.
This indicator lights up when the Wi-Fi Direct function is active.
To use this key, the wireless LAN option needs to be installed to
the machine when the machine's power is turned off.
14
Data In Indicator
This indicator flashes when the machine receives print data from a
host device.
This indicator lights up when there is a Locked Print file stored in
the machine.
15
Alert Indicator
Flashes when the toner is nearly empty, or lights up when the
machine runs out of toner or a machine error occurs.
16
Selection keys
Press the key underneath an item shown on the bottom line of the
screen to select it.
17
[Back] key
Press to cancel the last operation or to return to the previous level
of the menu tree.
18
[OK] Key
Press to confirm settings and specified values, or to move to the
next menu level.
19
[Start] key
Press to start scanning or copying.
20
NFC
Allows you to connect a smart device to the machine when you
touch NFC on a smart device using the application corresponding
to the machine.
For details, see page 50 "Using Application for Smart Devices".
25
1. Guide to the Machine
Installing Option
This section explains how to install options.
Attaching Paper Feed Unit
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• Before installing or removing options, always disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall
outlet and allow time for the main unit to fully cool. Failing to take these precautions could result
in burns.
• The machine weighs approximately 18 kg (40 lb.). Lift the machine using the inset grips on both
sides of the machine, and then move it horizontally to the place where you want to use it.
• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If the cord is
unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an
electrical or fire hazard.
• Tray 1 is required to print using the optional paper feed unit. Without Tray 1, paper jams will occur.
• Do not hold the tray to lift the machine.
1. Turn off the machine's power, and then pull the power plug out of the wall outlet.
2. Remove the adhesive tape and the cushioning material from the optional paper feed unit.
DYG315
26
Installing Option
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
DYH051
4. There are three upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align the holes of the
machine with the pins, and then lower the machine slowly.
DYG316
5. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet, and then turn on the power.
• After installing the optional paper feed unit, select Tray 2 in the printer driver. For details, see the
printer driver Help.
• If the new device is listed in the column of configuration options, it has been properly installed.
• If the optional paper feed unit is not installed properly, try to install it again by repeating the
procedure. If the problem persists, contact your sales or service representative.
• For details about printing the configuration page, see page 279 "Printing Lists/Reports (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 316 "Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)".
Installing the Wireless LAN option
• Before using the option, you must configure settings from the control panel. For details, see Setup
Guide.
27
1. Guide to the Machine
• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the interface units.
• Do not subject the interface units to physical shocks.
• Be sure to turn off the machine before installing the wireless LAN option.
• Insert the wireless LAN option into the USB port on the back of the machine. Do not insert it into the
USB flash disk port of the front of the machine.
• We recommend installing the printer driver on your computer after completing the configuration for
the wireless LAN option.
1. Check the contents of the package.
2. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
3. Fully insert the option.
DYG339
Check that the option is firmly connected to the USB port.
4. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.
5. Configure settings from the control panel.
For details, see Setup Guide.
• When using the touch panel model
Check that the wireless LAN option was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If it is
correctly installed, "Wireless (Wi-Fi) Status" will appear for "Network Settings" on the configuration
page. For details about printing the configuration page, see page 279 "Printing Lists/Reports
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
Check that the wireless LAN option was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If it is
correctly installed, "Wireless (Wi-Fi) Status" will appear for "Network Settings" on the configuration
page. For details about printing the configuration page, see page 316 "Printing Lists/Reports
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
28
Installing Option
• If the option was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
installed correctly even after trying the installation a second time, contact your sales or service
representative.
29
1. Guide to the Machine
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)".
Displaying the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
• Function or shortcut icons will be displayed on the [Home] screen. For details, see page 30 "How
to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• To use a different function, press the icon of the function you want to use.
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
The icons of each function are displayed on the [Home] screen.
You can add shortcuts to favorite items to [Home] screens 2 and 3. The icons of added shortcuts appear
on the [Home] screen. You can recall favorite items by pressing the shortcut icons.
To display the [Home] screen, press the [Home] key.
30
How to Use the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
[Home] screen 1
1
2
3
4
9
5
8
7
6
DYG341
[Home] screen 2
10
DYG342
1. Supply Information icon
Displays the remaining amount of toner.
2. [Scanner]
Press to scan originals and save images as files.
For details about how to use the scanner function, see page 139 "Scanning Originals".
3. [Fax]
Press to send or receive faxes.
For details about how to use the fax function, see page 193 "Sending and Receiving a Fax".
31
1. Guide to the Machine
4. Wireless LAN icon
Press to display the [Network Settings] screen.
This icon appears when the wireless LAN option is inserted into the USB port on the back of the machine and
[Wireless (Wi-Fi) Enable] is set to [Enable].
When wireless LAN connection is enabled, the
When Wi-Fi Direct connection is enabled, the
5.
icon appears.
icon appears.
/
Press to switch pages when the icons are not displayed on 1 page.
6. [Setting]
Press to customize the default settings of the machine to meet your requirements.
7. [Status]
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and Locked Print jobs. You can
also display the machine's maintenance information.
8. [Card]
Press to make ID card copies.
9. [Copier]
Press to make copies.
For details about how to use the copy function, see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
10. Shortcut icon
You can add shortcuts to favorite items to the [Home] screen. For details about how to register shortcuts, see
page 33 "Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
For details about examples of shortcuts that you can register, see page 36 "Example of favorite items (when
using the touch panel model)".
• You can change the order of favorite item icons. For details, see page 34 "Changing the Order
of Icons on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
32
Customizing the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Customizing the [Home] Screen (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
You can add shortcuts to favorite items in the [Home] screen. You can recall favorite items by pressing
the shortcut icons. You can rearrange the order of the function and shortcut icons.
How to Customize the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
You can customize the [Home] screen to make it more accessible.
The icons of each application are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can also add shortcuts to
favorite items registered in some applications.
For details about the items on the [Home] screen, see page 30 "How to Use the [Home] Screen (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When you register a favorite item, the shortcut to the favorite item appears on [Home] screens 2 or
3. If [Home] screens 2 and 3 do not have enough space for more icons, registering any more
favorite items becomes impossible.
• You can register a total of 12 icons for shortcuts to favorite items, 6 icons on each of the 2 pages.
Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)
When you register frequently used settings for functions such as copier and fax functions as favorite
items, the shortcuts to them appear on [Home] screens 2 or 3. For details about how to register a
favorite item, see page 35 "Registering Functions in a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
33
1. Guide to the Machine
Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)
You can change the order of the favorite item icons on [Home] screen 2 and 3 to make them more
accessible.
1. Press and hold an icon that you want to move for more than 2 seconds and release it.
2. Select [Move Up] or [Move Down].
The position of an icon switches from that of another icon located ahead or behind.
• You cannot change the order of the icons on the [Home] screen 1.
Deleting an Icon on the [Home] Screen (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Delete unused favorite item icons. You can only display icons and shortcuts that you use.
When a shortcut to a favorite item on the [Home] screen is deleted, the registered favorite item is also
deleted. For details about how to delete a favorite item, see page 37 "Deleting a Favorite Item (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• You cannot delete icons on the [Home] screen 1.
34
Registering Frequently Used Functions (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Registering Frequently Used Functions (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
You can store frequently used job settings in the machine memory and recall them easily.
Registering Functions in a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
You can register up to 12 favorite items for each function.
The following settings can be registered to favorite items:
• Copier:
Sim to Dup, Dup to Dup, Paper Tray, Reduce/Enlarge, Quantity, Original Settings, Original Type,
Other Settings, Sort
• Fax:
Immed. TX, TX Settings
• Scanner:
Original Settings, Scan Setting
• ID card copy:
Paper Tray, Quantity, Card Size, Original Settings, Original Type
This section explains how to register functions to a favorite item by using each application.
1. Edit the settings so all functions you want to register to a favorite item are selected on the
[Copier], [Fax], [Scanner], or [ID Card Copy Mode] screen.
2. Press the favorite item icon ( ) in the upper right of the screen.
3. Press the [Input favorite item name:] box.
4. Enter the favorite item name, and then press [OK].
5. Press the [Home] key.
The favorite item is registered to the [Home] screen.
• You can enter up to 8 characters for a favorite item name.
• Favorite items are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the [Clear/Stop] key unless
the favorite item is deleted or overwritten.
• Favorite items can be registered to the [Home] screen, and can be recalled easily. For details, see
page 33 "Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
35
1. Guide to the Machine
Example of favorite items (when using the touch panel model)
Copier
Favorite item name
Favorite item description
Effect
Eco copy
Specify [Sim to Dup].
You can save paper and
toner.
Thumbnail copy
Specify settings to combine
and print a multiple pages on
one side or both sides of
paper in [Other Settings].
You can copy up to four
pages onto one side of a
sheet, so that you can save
paper.
Fax
Favorite item name
Duplex fax transmission
Favorite item description
In [TX Settings], specify
[Duplex] for [Original
Settings].
Effect
After scanning the originals
printed on both sides of the
paper, you can send faxes.
• The names of favorite items given above are just examples. You can assign any name to a favorite
item according to your objectives.
• Depending on your business details or the type of documents to be scanned, registering a favorite
item cannot be recommended.
Recalling a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
You can recall the favorite item and operate the machine using the stored settings.
36
Registering Frequently Used Functions (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press [ ] until the favorite item icon you want appears.
3. Press the favorite item icon.
• Using the favorite item causes the previous settings to be cleared.
Deleting a Favorite Item (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press [ ] until the favorite item icon you want appears.
3. Press and hold down the favorite item icon for more than 2 seconds and release it.
4. Press [Delete].
37
1. Guide to the Machine
Displaying Frequently Used Modes
Preferentially (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)
This description is for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is turned on, or when System
Reset mode is turned on.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon.
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [ ].
5. Press [Function Priority].
6. Specify the mode to be displayed preferentially.
7. Press the [Home] key.
• For details about which modes you can specify, see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
38
Changing Operation Modes (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Changing Operation Modes (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SN only.
You can switch between copier and scanner modes by pressing the corresponding keys.
Press the [Copy] or [Scanner] key to activate each mode. While in each mode, the corresponding key
lights up.
DYG338
Function Priority
By default, copy mode is selected when the machine is turned on, or if the preset [System Auto
Reset Timer] time passes with no operation while the initial screen of the current mode is displayed.
You can change the selected mode using [Function Priority] under [Admin. Tools].
For details about [System Auto Reset Timer] or [Function Priority], see page 310 "Administrator
Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
39
1. Guide to the Machine
Multi-access
This machine can perform multiple jobs using different functions, such as copying and faxing, at the
same time. Performing multiple functions simultaneously is called “Multi-access”.
The following table shows the functions that can be performed simultaneously.
When Using the Touch Panel Model
Current job
Copying
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Printing
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
Scanning
• Fax immediate printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer (except when
TWAIN scanning)
• LAN-Fax transmission (except when TWAIN scanning)
• Mobile printing (from a device)
Fax immediate transmission
(scanning an original and
sending it simultaneously)
Fax memory transmission
(sending a fax that has already
been stored in the machine's
memory)
Fax receiving and printing
• Printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
• Copying
• Scanning
• Printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
Scanning*1
• Copying
Fax memory reception (storing
a received fax into the
machine's memory)
• Scanning
• Printing a Fax job in the machine's memory
• Printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
40
Multi-access
Current job
Printing a Fax job in the
machine's memory
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job
from a computer
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Fax memory reception
• Scanning*1
Scanning*1
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Scanning
• Fax immediate transmission
Printing
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Fax memory transmission
Mobile printing (from a
device)
• Fax memory reception
• Scanning
• Fax immediate transmission
*1 Fax printing may take longer than normal if you scan using the control panel at the same time, especially
when scanning multiple pages using the exposure glass.
When Using the Four-line LCD Panl Model
Current job
Scanning
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
Printing
• Scanning
Mobile printing (from a
device)
• Scanning
• If you try to use a function that cannot be performed simultaneously, you will hear a beep sound
from the machine or see a failure message pop up on your computer screen. In this case, try again
after the current job is finished.
41
1. Guide to the Machine
About Operation Tools
This section explains the operation tools of this machine.
Control Panel
The control panel contains a screen and keys for controlling the machine. They allow you to
configure the machine's various settings.
For details about how to use the control panel, see page 235 "Configuring the Machine Using the
Control Panel".
Web Image Monitor
You can check the machine's status and configure its settings by accessing the machine directly
using Web Image Monitor.
For details about how to use Web Image Monitor, see page 327 "Configuring the Machine Using
Utilities".
Smart Organizing Monitor
Install this utility on your computer from the included CD-ROM before using it.
Using Smart Organizing Monitor, you can check the machine's status, configure its settings, and
use other functions.
42
About Operation Tools
For details about how to use Smart Organizing Monitor, see page 368 "Using Smart Organizing
Monitor".
43
1. Guide to the Machine
Assigning a Setting to the Shortcut Key (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SN only.
You can access a frequently-used setting with a single keystroke by assigning the setting to the [Shortcut
to Func.] key.
You can configure settings for the following 2 function:
• ID Card Copy Mode
• Select Scanner Address
Assigning a Setting Using the Control Panel (When Using the Four-line LCD
Panel Model)
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Shortcut to Function], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the setting you want to configure, and then press the
[OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Assigning a Setting Using Web Image Monitor (When Using the Four-line LCD
Panel Model)
1. Start the web browser and enter "http://(the machine's IP address)/" in the address bar.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click the [Shortcut to Function] tab.
4. Specify the setting you want to configure from [Shortcut to Function Settings].
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [OK].
7. Close the web browser.
44
Assigning a Setting to the Shortcut Key (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
• For details about passwords, see page 363 "Configuring the Administrator Settings".
Accessing the Function Assigned to the Shortcut Key (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)
1. Press the [Shortcut to Func.] key.
DYG403
The function assigned to the [Shortcut to Func.] key is displayed.
45
1. Guide to the Machine
Entering Characters (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
This section describes how to enter text on the screens of the functions such as copier or fax or on the
Setting screen.
To open the keyboard, press the input box twice.
Character Entry Display (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
This section explains the entry screen and the keys displayed on it.
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
8
7
DYG343
1. Characters you enter are displayed on the text field.
2. Cancels the entered text and closes the character entry display.
3. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
4. Confirms text and closes the character entry display.
5. Deletes all characters that have been input.
6. Enters characters.
7. Switches between uppercase and lowercase.
8. Enters a space.
9. Displays the input method of the entry screen that is displayed after you press the No.10
key. You can also switch the input method by pressing this key.
46
Entering Characters (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
10. You can switch the input method by pressing this key. Press to enter numbers, symbols,
and some special characters.
Available Characters (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
You can enter the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789
Entering Text (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
When you enter a character, it appears at the position of the cursor.
Entering letters (when using the touch panel model)
1. Press the letters you want to enter.
Entering alphanumeric characters and symbols (when using the touch panel model)
1. Press [
] or [123].
2. Press the numbers or symbols you want to enter.
47
1. Guide to the Machine
Deleting characters (when using the touch panel model)
1. Press [
48
] or [C] to delete characters.
Entering Characters (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Entering Characters (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)
This description is for SP 330SN only.
To enter characters, use keys as follows:
To enter a digit
Press a number key.
To delete a character
Press the [ ] key.
To enter a name
Letters, numbers, and symbols can be entered using the number keys.
To enter two characters consecutively that use the same number key, press the [ ] key to move the
cursor before entering the second character.
DSG155
• Characters you can enter depend on the setting you are configuring.
• If the number you entered is too large or too small for the setting, it will not be accepted. If you
press the [OK] key, the machine will increase or decrease the number to the minimum or maximum
value for the setting.
49
1. Guide to the Machine
Using Application for Smart Devices
You can use the machine to print photographs and documents that are stored in your smart device.
Access the App Store or Google Play with your smart device, search for and download the application
corresponding to the machine from the site.
When Using the Touch Panel Model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Machine info] tab.
The QR code is displayed on the screen.
4. Start the application on the smart device, and then read the QR code.
Follow the instructions displayed on the application.
For details about how to connect a smart device to the machine using Near-field
communication (NFC), see page 52 "Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using
NFC".
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
50
Using Application for Smart Devices
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print List/Report], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Maintenance Page], and then press the [OK] key.
4. When a message appears, press the [OK] key.
The Maintenance page including the QR code is printed.
5. Start the application on the smart device, and then read the QR code.
Follow the instructions displayed on the application.
For details about how to connect a smart device to the machine using Near-field
communication (NFC), see page 52 "Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using
NFC".
51
1. Guide to the Machine
Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine
Using NFC
This section describes how to connect your smart device to the machine using NFC.
Writing the Machine's Information to NFC with a Smart Device
When Using the Touch Panel Model
1. Configure the network connection of the machine.
2. Access the App Store or Google Play from your smart device, search for and
download the application corresponding to the machine from the site.
3. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
4. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
5. Press the [Machine info] tab.
The QR code is displayed on the screen.
6. Start the application on the smart device, and then read the QR code.
7. Write the machine's network information to NFC using the application, and then
touch NFC with the smart device.
When Using Four-line LCD Panel Model
1. Configure the network connection of the machine.
2. Access the App Store or Google Play from your smart device, search for and
download the application corresponding to the machine from the site.
52
Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using NFC
3. Press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print List/Report], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Maintenance Page], and then press the [OK] key.
6. When a message appears, press the [OK] key.
The Maintenance page including the QR code is printed.
7. Start the application on the smart device, and then read the QR code.
8. Write the machine's network information to NFC using the application, and then
touch NFC with the smart device.
Using the Application on a Smart Device by Using NFC
1. Start the application on the smart device, and then touch NFC with the smart device.
2. Print using application corresponding to the machine by touching NFC or execute a scan
using the application.
53
1. Guide to the Machine
54
2. Paper Specifications and Adding
Paper
This chapter describes how to load paper and originals and about their specifications.
Workflow for Loading Paper and Configuring
Paper Sizes and Types
This section explains how to load paper and operations required after paper is loaded.
After following the procedures below, you can copy or print on the paper that is loaded in the machine.
Load paper into the paper tray.
Specify the paper type and size.
Specify the paper type and size on the printer driver.
For details about the procedures, refer to the next page.
Procedure
Reference
See page 56 "Loading Paper".
• When using the control panel
See page 64 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the
Control Panel".
• When using Web Image Monitor
See page 71 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Web
Image Monitor".
• When using Smart Organizing Monitor
See page 69 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Smart
Organizing Monitor".
See page 72 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer
Driver".
For details about supported paper, see page 74 "Supported Paper".
55
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Paper
This section explains how to load paper into the paper tray and the bypass tray.
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
For information about supported paper, precautions for storing paper and print areas, see page 74
"Supported Paper".
Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2
The following example explains the loading procedure for the standard paper tray (Tray 1).
The same procedure applies to loading paper in Tray 2.
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
• Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the upper limit mark inside the paper tray. Excessive
stacking can cause paper jams.
• If paper jams occur frequently, flip the paper stack in the tray.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• After loading paper, specify the paper size using the control panel and paper type using the
control panel. When printing a document, specify the same paper size and type in the printer
driver as specified on the printer.
• Do not move the side fences and end fence forcefully. Doing so may damage the tray.
• Do not slide the paper tray in forcefully when inserting the loaded tray into the printer. Otherwise,
the side and end fences of the bypass tray might move.
56
Loading Paper
1. Pull out the paper tray carefully with both hands.
DYH068
Place the tray on a flat surface.
2. Pinch the clip on the side fence and the end fence, and slide them to the maximum extent.
DYH070
3. Fan the paper before loading it.
DAC344
4. Load the paper in the tray with the print side faced down.
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray.
57
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DYH071
5. Slide the fences inward until they are flush against the sides of the paper.
DYH072
Check there are no gaps between the paper and the fences; both side and end fences.
DYG349
6. Carefully push the paper tray straight into the machine.
To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.
58
Loading Paper
DYH073
• The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how
much paper is remaining.
Extending Tray 1 to load paper
This section explains how to load paper longer than A4 (297 mm) into the machine.
1. Pull out tray 1 carefully with both hands.
Place the tray on a flat surface.
2. Pinch the lever in the rear of the tray, and then pull out the extender until it clicks.
DYG241
59
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
3. After extension, check that the arrows on the extender and tray are aligned.
DYG242
4. Follow Steps 2 to 6 in page 56 "Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2".
• To reinsert the extender, you might have to push it with moderate force.
Loading Paper into Bypass Tray
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Do not load paper while the machine is printing.
• Load paper with the print side up and in the short-edge feed direction.
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.
1. Open the bypass tray.
If you load A4 (297 mm) or larger size paper, pull out the bypass tray extension.
DYG245
60
Loading Paper
2. Slide the side fences outward, then load paper with the print side up, and push in until it
stops against the machine.
DYG247
3. Adjust the paper fences to the paper size.
DYG249
Loading Envelopes
• Before printing on envelopes, make sure to lower the levers on the machine rear, inside the rear
cover, to avoid envelopes coming out creased. Also, pull up the levers back to their original
positions after printing. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing
on paper other than envelopes.
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.
• Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by running
a pencil or ruler across them.
• Some kinds of envelope might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or print poorly.
• Print quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have different thicknesses. Print
one or two envelopes to check print quality.
61
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• In a hot and humid environment, the envelope might be output creased or improper printing
quality.
1. Open the bypass tray.
DYG243
2. Slide the side fences outward, then load envelopes with the print side up, and push in
until it stops against the machine.
Envelopes whose flaps are open must be printed with the flaps open, and envelopes whose flaps
are closed must be printed with the flaps closed. Before loading envelopes, make sure they are as
flat as possible.
3. Adjust the side fences to the envelope width.
DYG257
4. Open the rear cover.
DYG251
62
Loading Paper
5. Lower the levers for printing envelopes on both sides to the position indicated with an
envelope mark.
DYG253
Make sure to pull up the levers back to their original positions after printing.
6. Close the rear cover.
• Be sure to load envelopes so that their flaps are on the left. If you do not, the envelopes will
become creased.
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction, and
then rotate the print object by 180 degrees using the printer driver before printing. For details, see
the printer driver Help.
63
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
the Control Panel
This section describes how to specify the paper size and paper type using the control panel.
• Paper type and size can also be specified using the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
• When using the touch panel model
For prints from the bypass tray or Tray 1, you can select to print according to either the printer
driver settings or the control panel settings with [Bypass Tray Priority] under [Paper Settings]. For
details about [Bypass Tray Priority], see page 266 "Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
For prints from the bypass tray or Tray 1, you can select to print according to either the printer
driver settings or the control panel settings with [Bypass Tray Priority] or [Paper Tray Priority] under
[Tray Paper Settings]. For details about [Bypass Tray Priority] or [Paper Tray Priority], see
page 304 "Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When using the touch panel model
If [Auto Continue] under [System Settings] is enabled, printing stops temporarily if a paper type/
size error is detected. The printing restarts automatically with the settings made with the control
panel after about ten seconds. For details about [Auto Continue], see page 256 "System Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
If [Auto Continue] under [System Settings] is enabled, printing stops temporarily if a paper type/
size error is detected. The printing restarts automatically with the settings made with the control
panel after about ten seconds. For details about [Auto Continue], see page 294 "System Settings
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
Specifying the Paper Type
This section describes how to specify the paper type.
64
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Control Panel
When Using the Touch Panel Model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Paper Settings].
4. Select the tray for which you want to specify the paper type.
5. Select the desired paper type.
6. Press the [Home] key.
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper type setting for the desired tray, and then
press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired paper type, and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Back] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
65
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Specifying the Standard Paper Size
This section describes how to specify the standard paper size.
When Using the Touch Panel Model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Paper Settings].
4. Select the tray for which you want to specify the paper size.
5. Select the desired paper size.
6. Press the [Home] key.
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper size setting for the desired tray, and then
press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ], [ ],[ ], or [ ] key to select the desired paper size, and then press the
[OK] key.
66
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Control Panel
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Back] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Specifying a Custom Paper Size
This section describes how to specify a custom paper size.
• Custom size paper cannot be loaded in tray 2.
• When you perform printing, make sure that the paper size specified with the printer driver matches
the paper size specified with the control panel. If a paper size mismatch occurs, a message
appears on the display. To ignore the error and print using mismatched paper, see page 99 "If a
Paper Mismatch Occurs".
When Using the Touch Panel Model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Paper Settings].
4. Select the tray for which you want to specify the paper size.
5. Press [ ].
6. Press [Custom Size].
7. Select [mm] or [inch].
8. Press the box next to [Horiz:] twice.
9. Enter the horizontal size, and then press [OK].
10. Press the box next to [Vert:] twice.
11. Enter the vertical size, and then press [OK].
67
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
12. Confirm the size you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
13. Press the [Home] key.
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper size setting for the desired tray, and then
press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select [Custom Size], and then press the [OK]
key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [mm] or [inch], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Enter the width using number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
7. Enter the length using number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
8. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• When using the touch panel model, you can also enter a size by using the number keys. To enter a
size by using the number keys, press the box in Steps 8 and 10 only once.
• When using the four-line LCD panel model, you can press the [Back] key to exit to the previous
level of the menu tree.
68
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Smart Organizing Monitor
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
Smart Organizing Monitor
• For details about acquiring Smart Organizing Monitor, see Setup Guide.
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
1. On the [Start] menu, open the pull-down list next to [SP 330_3710_Series Software
Utilities].
2. Click [Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 330_3710_Series].
Smart Organizing Monitor starts.
3. If the machine you are using is not selected, click [Connect Printer], and then do one of the
following:
• Select the machine's model.
• Enter the IP address of the machine manually.
• Click [Search Network Printer] to search the machine via the network.
4. Click [OK].
5. On the [User Tools] tab, click [Printer Configuration].
If you are requested to enter an access code, enter the access code and then click [OK].
The default access code is "Admin".
6. On the [Paper Input] tab, select the paper type and paper size, and then click [OK].
7. Click [Close].
69
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Specifying a Custom Paper Size
1. On the [Start] menu, open the pull-down list next to [SP 330_3710_Series Software
Utilities].
2. Click [Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 330_3710_Series].
3. If the machine you are using is not selected, click [Connect Printer], and then do one of the
following:
• Select the machine's model.
• Enter the IP address of the machine manually.
• Click [Search Network Printer] to search the machine via the network.
4. Click [OK].
5. On the [User Tools] tab, click [Printer Configuration].
If you are requested to enter an access code, enter the access code and then click [OK].
The default access code is "Admin".
6. On the [Paper Input] tab, select [Custom Paper Size] in the [Paper Size] list.
7. In the [Unit:] list, select [mm] or [inch].
8. In the [Horizontal] box and [Vertical] box, specify the width and length.
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Close].
70
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Web Image Monitor
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
Web Image Monitor
This section describes how to specify paper sizes and types using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
4. Select the paper type and paper size for the tray you want to use.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [OK].
7. Close the web browser.
Specifying a Custom Paper Size
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering the IP address.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
4. Select [Custom Size] in the [Paper Size] list.
5. Select [mm] or [inch] and specify the width and length.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [OK].
8. Close the web browser.
71
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
the Printer Driver
• Make sure that the paper type and size specified with the printer driver matches the type and size
of the paper loaded in the tray. Since this machine does not detect paper sizes automatically, the
type or size of the paper may be mismatched and the print job may not print correctly.
When Using Windows
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
PCL printer driver
1. Open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the printer driver.
For information of how to open the printer driver properties from [Devices and Printers], see
page 96 "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box".
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
2. Click the [Paper] tab.
3. In the [Input Tray:] list, select the paper tray you want to use for printing.
4. In the [Paper Type:] list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
72
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer Driver
5. Select the [Print On] check box and select the size of the paper that is loaded in the
paper tray.
Clear the [Fit to Print Size] check box as necessary.
6. Click [OK].
PostScript printer driver
1. Open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the printer driver.
2. Click the [Paper/Quality] tab.
3. In the [Paper Source:] list, select the paper tray you want to use for printing.
4. In the [Media:] list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
5. Click [OK].
When Using OS X
The procedure in this section is an example based on OS X 10.11. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using.
4. In the [Default paper Size:] list, select the size of the document to be printed.
73
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Supported Paper
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel or using
Smart Organizing Monitor and the printer driver. This machine does not detect the paper size
automatically.
• When loading custom size paper into Tray 1 or the bypass tray, specify the width and length using
the control panel or using Smart Organizing Monitor and the printer driver.
• When printing on custom size paper from the bypass tray, you can print without specifying the
paper type or paper size from the control panel depending on the settings for [Bypass Tray
Priority].
Tray 1
Type
Size
Capacity
Plain Paper
A4
52 to 162 g/m2
250
Recycled Paper
B5 JIS
(14 to 43 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Thick Paper 1
A5 LEF (210 × 148 mm)
Thick Paper 2
A5 SEF
Thin Paper
B6 JIS
Letterhead
A6
Preprinted Paper
81/2 × 14
Label Paper
81/2 × 11
Prepunched Paper
51/2 × 81/2
Bond Paper
81/2 × 14
Cardstock
81/2 × 13
Color Paper
16K
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
74
Weight
Supported Paper
Type
Size
Weight
Capacity
Plain Paper
Custom size:
52 to 162 g/m2
250
Recycled Paper
100 to 216 mm in width,
(14 to 43 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Thick Paper 1
148 to 356 mm in length
Thick Paper 2
(3.94 to 8.50 inches in width,
Thin Paper
5.83 to 14.02 inches in length)
Letterhead
Preprinted Paper
Label Paper
Prepunched Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Color Paper
Tray 2 (option)
Type
Size
Weight
Capacity
Thin Paper
A4
60 to 105 g/m2
250
Plain Paper
B5 JIS
(16 to 28 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Thick Paper 1
A5 SEF
Recycled Paper
81/2 × 14
Color Paper
81/2 × 132/5
Preprinted Paper
81/2 × 11
Prepunched Paper
51/2 × 81/2
Letterhead
75
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Bypass tray
Type
Size
Plain Paper
A4
52 to 162 g/m2
50
Recycled Paper
B5 JIS
(14 to 43 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Thick Paper 1
A5 LEF (210 × 148 mm)
Thick Paper 2
A5 SEF
Thin Paper
B6 JIS
Letterhead
A6
Envelope
81/2 × 14
Label Paper
81/2 × 11
Preprinted Paper
51/2 × 81/2
Prepunched Paper
81/2 × 13
Bond Paper
16K
Cardstock
41/8 × 91/2
Color Paper
37/8 × 71/2
C5 Env
C6 Env
DL Env
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
76
Capacity*1
Weight
Supported Paper
Type
Size
Capacity*1
Weight
Plain Paper
Custom size:
52 to 162 g/m2
50
Recycled Paper
90 to 216 mm in width,
(14 to 43 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Thick Paper 1
140 to 356 mm in length
Thick Paper 2
(3.54 to 8.50 inches in width,
Thin Paper
5.51 to 14.02 inches in length)
Letterhead
Envelope
Label Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Color Paper
*1 The number of envelopes that can be loaded is up to 8.
Specifications of Paper Types
The following tables describe the types of paper that can be used with this machine.
• Depending on the paper type, the toner may take a while to dry. Before handling printed sheets,
make sure that they have fully dried. Otherwise, the toner may smudge.
• Print quality can be guaranteed only if recommended paper is used. For more information about
the recommended paper, contact your sales or service representative.
Plain Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
65 to 99 g/m2 (17 to 27 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
77
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Item
Duplex supported size
Description
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
Thick Paper 1
Item
Description
Paper thickness
100 to 130 g/m2 (27 to 35 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.*1
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
*1 You can use thick paper that is 105 g/m2 or less when using Tray 2 or the duplex function.
Thick Paper 2
Item
78
Description
Paper thickness
131 to 162 g/m2 (35 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Supported Paper
Thin Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
52 to 64 g/m2 (14 to 16 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.*1
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
*1 You can use thin paper that is 60 g/m2 or more when using Tray 2 or the duplex function.
Recycled Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
79
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Color Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Preprinted Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
Notes
80
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Supported Paper
Prepunched Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Letterhead
Item
Description
Paper thickness
100 to 130 g/m2 (27 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.*1
Duplex supported size
A4
81/2 × 14
81/2 × 11
81/2 × 13
16K
81/2 × 132/5
81/2 × 133/5
8.11 × 13.3
Notes
Paper that has a thickness outside the specified range cannot be printed
onto.
*1 You can use Letterhead that is 105 g/m2 or less when using Tray 2 or the duplex function.
81
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Bond Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
100 to 160 g/m2 (27 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Cardstock
Item
Description
Paper thickness
100 to 160 g/m2 (27 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Label Paper
Item
82
Description
Paper thickness
100 to 160 g/m2 (27 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
Avoid using adhesive label paper on which glue is exposed. Glue may stick
to the inner parts of the machine, which can cause paper feed problems,
deterioration in print quality, or premature wear of the print cartridge's
photo conductor unit.
Supported Paper
Envelope
Item
Description
Supported paper tray
Bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.
• Paper can be loaded only up to the lower of the two paper limit marks of the tray.
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction. Also,
configure the printer driver to rotate the print object 180 degrees. For details about changing the
orientation see the printer driver Help.
• Environmental factors can degrade the print quality on both recommended and non-recommended
envelopes.
• If envelopes are severely curled after printing, flatten them by bending them back against the curl.
• After printing, envelopes sometimes have creases along their long edges and toner smear on their
unprinted sides. Print images might also be blurred. When printing large, black-solid areas, striping
can occur as a result of the envelopes overlapping.
• To correctly specify the length of an envelope whose flap opens along its short edge, be sure to
include the open flap when measuring.
CER112
• Fan envelopes, and then align their edges before loading.
DAC573
83
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• When fanning envelopes, make sure they are not stuck together. If they are stuck together,
separate them.
• When fanning envelopes, make sure the envelope flaps are not stuck. If they are stuck, separate
them.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten them out so that their curl does not exceed that shown as shown
below.
DAC574
• If the curl is severe, flatten out the envelopes using your fingers, as shown below.
DAC575
Non-Recommended Paper Types
Do not use the following types of paper:
• Ink-jet printer paper
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
• Dirty or damaged paper
84
Supported Paper
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead paper.
Malfunctions are especially likely when using paper printed on by other than a laser printer
(e.g.monochrome and color copiers, ink-jet printers, etc.)
• Thermal paper and carbon paper
• Paper weighing heavier or lighter than the limit
• Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• Adhesive label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
• Paper with glue on it
• When loading paper, take care not to touch the surface of the paper.
• Even if paper is adequate for the machine, poorly stored paper can cause paper misfeeds, print
quality degradation, or malfunctions.
Paper Storage
• Store paper appropriately. If the paper is stored incorrectly, misfeeds, lower printing quality, or
malfunctions may result.
When storing paper:
• Do not store paper in a humid place.
• Do not store paper in direct sunlight.
• Do not stand paper on its edge.
• Store any leftover paper in a wrapping or box supplied with the paper.
Print Area
The diagram below shows the area of the paper that the machine can print on.
85
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
From the printer driver
4
4
3
1
3
2
CHZ904
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
Envelope
3
1
2
3
4
4
CMC044
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approximately 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approximately 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
86
Supported Paper
Copier function
4
4
3
1
3
2
CHZ904
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Leading edge: Approx. 4 mm (0.2 inches), Trailing edge: Approx. 3 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approx. 2.8 mm (0.1 inches)
Fax function
4
4
3
1
3
2
CHZ904
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approx. 2 mm (0.08 inches)
87
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Borderless printing is not supported.
• The print area may vary depending on the paper size, printer language and printer driver settings.
• For better envelope printing, we recommend you set the right, left, top, and bottom print margins to
at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.
88
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the types of originals you can set and how to place them.
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass.
• Do not place originals before any correction fluid and toner has completely dried. Doing so may
make marks on the exposure glass that will appear on copies.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
1. Lift the ADF.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
DYG262
3. Lower the ADF.
Hold down the ADF with your hands when using thick, folded, or bound originals and when the
ADF cannot be lowered completely.
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder
By using the ADF, you can scan multiple pages at once.
• Do not place different size originals in the ADF at once.
• Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ADF.
89
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the pages of your original before placing
them in the ADF.
• Place the original squarely.
1. Open the cover of the input tray for the ADF and adjust the guides according to the size of
the original.
DYG263
2. Place the aligned originals face up in the ADF. The last page should be on the bottom.
DYG264
• When placing originals longer than A4 or 81/2 × 11, pull out the ADF tray's extenders.
About Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed and the parts of the original that are
unscannable.
Recommended size of originals
This section describes the recommended size of the original.
Exposure glass
Up to 216 mm (8.5 inches) in width, up to 297 mm (11.7 inches) in length
90
Placing Originals
ADF
• Paper size: 140 to 216 mm (51/2 to 81/2 inches) in width, 140 to 356 mm (51/2 to 14
inches) in length
• Paper weight: 52 to 105 g/m2 (13.8 to 28.0 lb.)
• Only 1 sheet of an original can be placed on the exposure glass at a time.
• In the ADF, up to 35 sheets of originals can be placed at once (when using paper weighing 80
g/m2, 20 lb.).
Types of originals not supported by the Auto Document Feeder
If placed in the ADF, the following types of original might be damaged or become jammed, or result in
gray or black lines appearing on prints:
• Originals larger or heavier than recommended
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin, highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Originals that are wet with toner or white out
Unscannable image area
Even if you correctly place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass, margins of a few millimeters on
all four sides of the original might not be scanned.
91
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
CES107
Margins when using exposure glass
In copier mode
In scanner mode
In fax mode
Top
4 mm (0.2 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Right
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Left
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Bottom
3.3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Margins when using ADF
In copier mode
92
In scanner mode
In fax mode
Top
4 mm (0.2 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Right
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Left
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Bottom
3.3 mm (0.1 inches)
2 mm (0.08 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
3. Printing Documents
This chapter describes how to configure settings on the printer driver and print documents.
What You Can Do with the Printer Function
Duplex printing
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For details, see the printer driver Help.
DSG261
Combined printing
You can combine multiple pages and print them on a single sheet of paper. For details, see the
printer driver Help.
1
2
3
DSG262
93
3. Printing Documents
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
When bidirectional communication works correctly, your computer obtains information about option,
paper size and paper feed direction settings from the machine automatically. Bidirectional
communication also allows you to monitor machine status.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
When connected with the network
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
• The TCP/IP protocol or the IPP protocol is used. (When using the IPP protocol, the IPP
port name must include the IP address.)
When connected with USB
• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled
This section describes how to set up option and setting of paper size for each tray on your computer
manually.
• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
When Using Windows
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10.
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] under [Windows System].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
4. Click the [Accessories] tab.
5. Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
94
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
6. Click [Paper Size Settings] tab.
7. In [Input Tray:] select which trays to use, and then, in [Paper Size:] select the size of the
paper that you want to load in each tray.
Click [Update] to apply the setting for each tray.
8. Click [Apply].
9. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
When Using OS X
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click [Options], and then configure settings as needed.
5. Click [OK].
6. Quit System Preferences.
95
3. Printing Documents
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box
To change the default settings of the printer driver, configure settings in the [Printing preferences] dialog
box.
To change the default settings of all applications, open the [Printing preferences] dialog box from the
OS. For details, see page 96 "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the [Start] Menu".
To change the default settings of a specific application, open the [Printing preferences] dialog box from
that application. For details, see page 96 "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an
Application".
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the [Start] Menu
This section explains how to open the [Printing preferences] dialog box from [Devices and Printers].
• When the printer driver is distributed from the print server, the setting values specified by the server
are displayed as the default for [Printing Defaults...].
• You cannot configure different print settings for each user. The settings configured in this dialog box
are used as the default.
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] under [Windows System].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
4. Click [Printing preferences].
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application. To make printer settings for a specific
application, open the [Printing preferences] dialog box from that application.
The settings displayed in the [Printing preferences] dialog box opened from the [Devices and Printers]
window are applied as the default in the [Printing preferences] dialog box opened in an application.
When printing from an application, modify the settings as required.
The screens displayed may differ depending on the application. The following procedure explains how
to print documents from an application using WordPad in Windows 10 as an example.
Displaying the printing preferences dialog box in an application when using
Windows
1. Click [File] in the upper left corner of the window, and then click [Print].
96
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
• Procedures for opening the [Printing preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application.
For details, see the printer driver Help or the manuals provided with the application.
Displaying the Printing preferences Dialog Box in an Application When Using OS X
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Open the document to print.
2. Select [Print...] on the [File] menu.
3. Check that the machine name or IP address you are using is selected in the [Printer:]
popup menu.
If the machine name or IP address you are using is not selected in the [Printer:] list, click the list, and
then select the machine.
97
3. Printing Documents
Basic Operation of Printing
• Duplex printing is selected as the default setting.
The following procedure explains how to perform basic printing.
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10 and PCL 6 driver. The actual
procedure may vary depending on the operating system you are using.
For details of printing options, see the printer driver Help.
1. Open the printer properties dialog box in your document's application.
For details about how to open the printer properties dialog box, see page 96 "Displaying the
Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application".
For details about each setting, click [Help]. You can also click the information icons to show
configuration information.
2. Set printing options as necessary, and then click [OK].
The printer properties dialog box closes.
3. Click [Print].
98
Basic Operation of Printing
• In the following setting menu, you can specify which paper tray is selected first when the trays are
automatically selected while you are printing. For details about [Paper Tray Priority], see
page 266 "Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 304 "Tray Paper
Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When using the touch panel model: [Paper Tray Priority] under [Paper Settings]
• When using the four-line LCD panel model: [Paper Tray Priority] under [Tray Paper Settings]
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically. For details about how to
remove the jammed paper, see page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
• After printing on envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers for printing on envelopes back to their
original positions. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes. For details about the levers for printing on envelopes, see page 56
"Loading Paper".
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs
The machine reports an error if:
• The paper size does not match the print job's settings when the following setting item is enabled.
• When using the touch panel model: [Size Mismatch Detection] under [Paper Settings]
• When using the four-line LCD panel model: [Size Mismatch Detection] under [Tray Paper
Settings]
• The paper type does not match the print job's settings when [Input Tray:] is set to [Auto Tray Select].
There are two ways to resolve these errors:
Continue printing using mismatched paper
Ignore the error and print using mismatched paper.
Cancel the print job
Cancel printing.
• For details about [Size Mismatch Detection], see page 266 "Paper Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)" or page 304 "Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• If [Auto Continue] under [System Settings] is enabled, the machine ignores the paper type and size
settings and prints on whatever paper is loaded. Printing stops temporarily when the error is
detected, and restarts automatically after about ten seconds using the settings made on the control
panel. For details about [Auto Continue], see page 256 "System Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)" or page 294 "System Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
99
3. Printing Documents
Continuing printing using mismatched paper
If the paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.
When using the touch panel model
1. While the error message is displayed, press [Form Feed].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. While the error message is displayed, press the [OK] key.
DYG400
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel print jobs using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on the
status of the job.
Canceling a print job before printing has started
Windows
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task tray of your computer.
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click
[Cancel].
3. Click [Yes].
OS X and macOS
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Open Print Queue...].
4. Select the queue you want to delete.
5. Click [×].
100
Basic Operation of Printing
• If you cancel a print job that has already been processed, printing may continue for a few pages
before being canceled.
• It may take a while to cancel a large print job.
Canceling a print job while printing
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DYG330
2. Press [Print Jobs] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DYG328
101
3. Printing Documents
Printing Confidential Documents
By the Locked Print function, you can password-protect print jobs.
This means that your job is printed only after you enter the password using the machine's control panel.
This function prevents unauthorized users from seeing sensitive documents at the machine.
• This function is only available when using the PCL printer driver, and printing from a computer
running a Windows operating system.
• The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10.
Storing a Locked Print file
This section explains how to store a Locked Print file in the machine using the printer driver.
You can also store a Locked Print file in the machine using the application corresponding to the machine.
For details about the application, see the manuals for the application.
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
3. In the [Select Printer] area, select the name of this machine, and then click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Setup] tab, and then select the [Locked Print] check box.
The [Password:] and [User ID:] text boxes become available.
The [User ID:] text box contains the login user name of your computer account or the user code
used for the previous Locked Print job.
5. Type the password (containing 4 to 8 digits) and user ID (containing 1 to 9 alphanumeric
characters), and then click [OK].
The user ID will be used to identify your Locked Print file on the machine's control panel.
6. Execute a print command.
The print job is stored in the machine as a Locked Print file. You can print the file by entering the
password using the control panel.
• The locked print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out, when
the machine's power is turned off, or when the machine restarts automatically to reflect the settings.
• The machine can store up to 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print data at a time.
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files, the machine holds a new Locked Print
file for the period of time specified in [Locked Print] under system settings before canceling the job.
102
Printing Confidential Documents
Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also print or delete an
existing Locked Print file so that the new Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
Printing a Locked Print file
When using the touch panel model
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, "Locked Print Job" appears on the
machine's control panel display when the machine is in the copier, fax, scanner, or ID card copy
mode.
Also, "Locked Print Job" appears on the [Status] screen.
Use the following procedure to unlock and print the Locked Print file.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
103
3. Printing Documents
3. Press the [Locked Print] tab.
You can also display the Locked Print file list by pressing [Check] on the [Status] tab.
4. Select the file you want to print.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
5. Press [Print Jobs].
6. Press the [Locked Print Password:] box.
To use the application to start printing a locked print file, hold a smart device on which the
application corresponding to the machine is running.
7. Enter the password, and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, "Locked Print Job" and "Press User Tools
key." appears on the machine's control panel display.
Use the following procedure to unlock and print the Locked Print file.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the file you want to print, and then press the [OK]
key.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
3. Select [Print].
4. Enter the password using the number keys.
Press the [Back] key to discard the current digits and exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
To use the application to start printing a locked print file, hold a smart device on which the
application corresponding to the machine is running.
5. Press the [OK] key.
The Locked Print file is printed.
• You cannot print a Locked Print file while the machine is currently printing. The machine beeps if
you try to do so.
• While entering a password using the control panel, the machine cannot process other print jobs.
104
Printing Confidential Documents
Deleting a Locked Print file
When using the touch panel model
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, "Locked Print Job" appears on the
machine's control panel display when the machine is in the copier, fax, scanner, or ID card copy
mode.
Also, "Locked Print Job" appears on the [Status] screen.
Use the following procedure to delete a Locked Print file. You do not need to enter a password to
delete a Locked Print file.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Locked Print] tab.
You can also display the Locked Print file list by pressing [Check] on the [Status] tab.
105
3. Printing Documents
4. Select the file you want to delete.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
5. Press [Delete Jobs].
The Locked Print file is deleted.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, "Locked Print Job" and "Press User Tools
key." appears on the machine's control panel display.
Use the following procedure to unlock and print the Locked Print file. You do not need to enter a
password to delete a Locked Print file.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the file you want to delete, and then press the [OK]
key.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
3. Select [Delete].
The Locked Print file is deleted.
If there are Locked Print files/logs remaining in the machine, the display returns to the list of
Locked Print files/logs. If there are none remaining, the display returns to the initial screen.
106
Printing with Mopria
Printing with Mopria
This machine supports Mopria.
For more information about Mopria, please visit: http://mopria.org/how-to-print.
107
3. Printing Documents
Using Various Print Functions
This section briefly describes various print functions that you can configure with the printer driver to make
printouts appropriate for your purposes.
Print Quality Functions
Print quality and color tone can be adjusted to suit the print data. Some of the print quality settings you
can configure are described below.
Changing the image printing method
You can select to print with priority on print quality or print speed. When printing images, the higher
the resolution of images, the longer the time required for printing.
Changing the graphics mode
You can send graphic information to the machine as either raster or vector images. Most geometric
shapes or patterns print faster as vector images than as raster images. However, if certain graphics
do not print as they appear on the screen, try to print them as raster images.
Saving toner when printing
You can save toner by printing with lower toner consumption. While this increases the life of the
print cartridge, the output appears slightly lighter.
Changing the printable area
You can change the printable area when printing a document printed on a single page with one
machine is printed on two separate pages with another machine, or vice-versa.
Changing the method of downloading TrueType fonts to the machine
When you print documents that contain characters in TrueType fonts, garbled or distorted
characters may be printed. Changing the method of downloading TrueType fonts may help to solve
the problem.
Changing the dither pattern
A dither pattern is a pattern of dots used to simulate a color or shade of an image. If the pattern is
changed, the characteristics of the image will also change. You can select a pattern suitable for the
image to be printed.
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.
108
Using Various Print Functions
Print Output Functions
You can specify the form of print outputs according to your purposes. This section briefly describes some
of the settings that you can specify.
Printing multiple sets of a document
You can print multiple sets of the same document.
Collating the output in document batches
You can print complete sets of a multiple-page document one set at a time (P1, P2, P1, P2 ...). If this
function is not used when printing multiple sets, prints will be output in page batches (P1, P1, P2,
P2 ...). This function is useful when, for example, making presentation materials.
Changing orientation or rotating the image
You can change the orientation of an image to portrait or landscape. You can also rotate the
image by 180 degrees. Use rotation to prevent an image from being printed upside down when
using paper with a predefined top and bottom (such as letterhead paper).
Printing multiple pages per sheet
You can print multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.
When using this function, a suitable reduction ratio is selected automatically based on the paper
size and the number of pages you want to fit on each sheet.
Printing on both sides of paper (duplex printing)
You can print on both sides of paper.
Reducing or enlarging the document
You can reduce or enlarge documents by a specific ratio, from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.
You can also reduce or enlarge documents automatically to fit a specific paper size. This function is
useful, for example, when printing Web pages.
If the [Enable Large Papers] option is selected, A3/11 × 17/B4/8K documents can be scaled to
a size that the machine supports, so that it can then be printed out.
Not printing of blank pages
If a print job contains blank pages, they can be prevented from being printed.
Note that this setting has higher priority than [Blank Page Print] under printer feature settings of the
control panel.
Printing with a cover page
You can add a cover page to the print job.
You can select to leave the cover page blank, or print the first page of the document on the cover
page. If a cover page is inserted into a duplex job, you can print on its back side also.
Paper for the cover page can either be the same as or different from the remaining pages.
109
3. Printing Documents
Printing on custom size paper
You can print using non-standard size paper by specifying the size of the paper as custom size.
To specify the custom paper size, select [Custom Paper Size] from the [Document Size:] list, and
then click the [Custom Paper Size...] button in the lower part of the dialog box to configure the
paper size.
Superimposing text on prints (watermark)
You can superimpose watermark text on prints. Various predefined watermarks are provided. You
can also create your own watermarks.
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.
110
4. Copying Originals
This chapter describes the basic and advanced procedures for making copies and how to specify
settings.
What You Can Do with the Copier Function
Duplex copying
You can copy two pages onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. For details about the settings,
see page 121 "Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing" and
page 126 "Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing".
DYG379
Combined copying
You can copy multiple pages onto a single sheet of paper. For details about the settings, see
page 121 "Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing" and page 126
"Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing".
1
2
3
DYG380
ID card copying
ID card copying allows you to copy the front and back sides of an ID card or passport onto one
side of a sheet of paper. For details, see page 131 "Copying an ID Card".
1
2
DYG381
111
4. Copying Originals
Copier Mode Screen
This section provides information about the screen when the machine is in copier mode.
When using the touch panel model
1
2
3
4
9
5
6
8
7
DYG382
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Paper tray status indicators
Displays paper tray settings.
3. Favorite item icon
Press to register current settings to a favorite item.
4. Copy quantity
Displays the numbers of copies set and copies made. You can change the copy quantity using the
number keys.
5. Reduce/Enlarge ratio
You can specify the enlargement and reduction ratios if [Reduce/Enlarge] is pressed.
6. [Other Settings]
Press to display the functions you can use.
7. [Sort]
Configures the machine to sort the output pages into sets when making multiple copies of a multipage
document.
8. Original and scanning settings
Press to specify the original type and image density level.
9. [Sim to Dup], [Dup to Dup]
Press to set the duplex function.
112
Copier Mode Screen
When using the four-line LCD panel model
DYG383
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Current settings
Displays the current tray, reproduction ratio, and scan settings.
3. Selection key items
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.
4. Copy quantity
Displays the current copy quantity. You can change the copy quantity using the number keys.
• The start-up mode can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under the administrator settings.
For details, see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or
page 310 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
113
4. Copying Originals
Basic Operation of Copying
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Duplex copying is selected as the default setting.
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals". If necessary, configure advanced
photocopy settings.
4. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
5. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
114
Basic Operation of Copying
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Copy] key.
DYG331
2. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals". If necessary, configure advanced
photocopy settings.
3. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
4. Press the [Start] key.
DYG334
• The maximum number of copies is 99.
• You can change the paper tray temporarily for printing out copies. To change the setting, press the
icon indicating the tray if you are using the touch panel model, or press the [ ] or [ ] key if you are
using the four-line LCD panel model. Also, you can select to change the paper tray automatically
according to the paper size (A4 or Letter).
• You can select the paper tray for printing out copies in [Select Paper] under copy settings. If you set
the machine to switch between Tray 1 and other trays automatically depending on the paper size
in this setting, you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under the
paper settings. For [Select Paper], see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)" or page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
115
4. Copying Originals
Model)". For [Paper Tray Priority], see page 266 "Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)" or page 304 "Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can select whether copies are output
in collated sets, or in page batches in the [Sort] setting under copy settings. For [Sort], see
page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 287 "Copier
Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can select whether copies are output
in collated sets, or in page batches in the [Sort] setting under copy settings. For [Sort], see
page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically.
• If a scanning jam occurs in the ADF, copying is canceled immediately. In this case, copy the
originals again starting from the jammed page. For the direction to remove the jammed paper, see
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Canceling a Copy
While scanning the original
If copying is canceled while the machine is scanning the original, copying is cancelled immediately
and there is no printout.
When the original is set in the ADF, scanning stops immediately and all the originals are ejected.
While printing (when using the touch panel model)
If copying is canceled during printing, the photocopy process is canceled after the current page
has been printed out.
Follow the procedure below to cancel copying.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
116
Basic Operation of Copying
3. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DYG330
When the [Cancel Jobs] screen appears, proceed to Step 4.
4. Press [Copy Jobs].
While printing (when using the four-line LCD panel model)
If copying is canceled during printing, the photocopy process is canceled after the current page
has been printed out.
Follow the procedure below to cancel copying.
1. Press the [Copy] key.
DYG331
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DYG328
117
4. Copying Originals
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies
There are two ways to set the scaling ratio: using a preset ratio or manually specifying a customized
ratio.
Preset ratio
CES103
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
•
(mainly North America)
50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
Custom ratio
CES106
25% to 400% in 1% increments.
118
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies
Specifying Reduce/Enlarge
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Reduce/Enlarge].
4. Select a ratio from the list or enter the ratio you require. Also, you can specify the
ratio by pressing [+] or [-] in increments of 1%.
5. Press [OK].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Copy] key.
DYG331
2. Press [Scale].
119
4. Copying Originals
3. Press [Reduce], [Enlarge], or [Zoom].
For [Reduce] or [Enlarge], press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select the desired ratio. For
[Zoom], specify the desired ratio using the number keys.
4. Press the [OK] key.
• You can change the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting to always make photocopies in
the specified ratio. For details, see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)" or page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
120
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided
and Combined Printing
This section explains how to combine and print a multiple pages (two or four pages) on one side or both
sides of paper.
• This function is only available when the original is set in the ADF, not when it is set on the exposure
glass.
• To use this function, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4, Letter or Legal.
• The types of paper that can be used for 2-sided copy are plain, thin, thick paper 1, recycled,
color, preprinted, prepunched, and letterhead.
There are following copy modes. Select a copy mode according to your original and how you want the
copy outputs to appear.
Combined copy on one side
In this mode, a two or four-page original is combined and printed on one side of paper.
2 on 1
Copy
Landscape
Portrait
Original
CMF250
121
4. Copying Originals
4 on 1
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom
Left to Right
Top to Bottom
Landscape
Portrait
Left to Right
CMF251
Combined copy on both sides
In this mode, a multiple-page original is combined and printed on both sides of paper.
2 on 1
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Landscape
Portrait
Top to Top
DUE331
122
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
4 on 1
Copy
8
6
5
5
7
7
Portrait
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
6
7
8
8
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
5
5
6
6
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
7
Left to Right, Top to Top
8
Original
CMF255
Copy
5
8
6
5
7
Landscape
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
7
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
6
7
8
8
5
5
6
6
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
7
Left to Right, Top to Top
8
Original
DCT004
1 on 1
In this mode, one-sided pages are printed on the front and back sides of paper without being
combined.
123
4. Copying Originals
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Landscape
Portrait
Top to Top
DYG420
Specifying Combined and 2-sided Copies
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Other Settings].
4. Press [Simplex to Duplex].
5. Select the desired copy mode, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
124
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Duplex] key.
DYG321
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired copy mode, and then press the [OK]
key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select paper orientation and page order, and then press
the [OK] key.
• Setting combined and 2-sided copying automatically disables the ID card copy setting.
• You can change the machine's default [Duplex/Combine] setting to always make photocopies in
the specified ratio. For details, see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)" or page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
125
4. Copying Originals
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and
Combined Printing
This section explains how to make 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals, or copy two original pages to
one sheet, or copy four original pages to one sheet with two pages per side.
DAC602
DAC603
DAC603
• You can use the exposure glass for manual duplex scanning. Other settings require the ADF.
There are following copy modes:
Combined copy on one side
• 2 on 1
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.
• 4 on 1
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 on 1
Makes 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals.
Combined copy on both side
• 2 on 1
126
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
Copies both sides of one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet, and both sides of another 2sided original to the other side of the sheet.
• 4 on 1
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
Manual duplex scan
Select this mode to make 2-sided copies using the exposure glass.
Duplex Copying Using the ADF
This function is available for the touch panel model only.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Other Settings].
4. Press [Duplex to Duplex].
5. Select the desired copy mode, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
7. Place all 2-sided originals into the ADF with their fronts facing up.
DYG264
127
4. Copying Originals
DYH224
8. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
• After you place the originals, press the [Start] key within the time specified in [System Reset Timer].
Otherwise, the job is canceled. For details, see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• If the memory becomes full while originals are being scanned, the job is canceled.
128
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
Duplex Copying Manually Using the Exposure Glass
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Other Settings].
4. Press [Manual Duplex Scan].
5. Press [OK].
6. Place the original on the exposure glass front side down and with the top to the rear
of the machine.
Place the originals one by one.
7. Press the [Start] key.
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass
appears on the display.
8. Place the original on the exposure glass with the back side faced down and with the
top to the rear of the machine.
9. Press [Start].
When all originals have been scanned, press [Job Finished].
129
4. Copying Originals
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Duplex] key.
DYG321
2. Press the [ ] key or [ ] key to select [Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode], and then press
the [OK] key.
3. Place the original on the exposure glass front side down and with the top to the rear
of the machine.
Place the originals one by one.
4. Press the [Start] key.
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass
appears on the display.
5. Place the original on the exposure glass with the back side faced down and with the
top to the rear of the machine.
6. Press the [Start] key again.
When all originals have been scanned, press the [ ] key.
• After you load the original, press the [Start] key within the time specified in [System Reset Timer] or
[System Auto Reset Timer]. Otherwise, the job is canceled. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310 "Administrator
Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Sort is not available.
130
Copying an ID Card
Copying an ID Card
This section describes how to copy the front and back sides of an ID card or other small documents onto
one side of a sheet of paper.
• You cannot use the duplex function with the ID card copy function.
• This function is available only when the original is set on the exposure glass, not when it is set in the
ADF.
• To use this function, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A6, A5, A4, Half Letter,
or Letter.
Printed paper size
Scanned paper size
A4
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
Letter
Half Letter (140 × 216 mm)
A5
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
A6
A7 (74 × 105 mm)
Half Letter
Quarter of Letter size paper (70 × 108 mm)
DUE332
131
4. Copying Originals
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Card] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
4. Place the original with the front side faced down in the upper-left corner of the
exposure glass.
DYH228
5. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass
appears on the display.
132
Copying an ID Card
6. Place the original on the exposure glass with the back side faced down and with the
top to the rear of the machine, and then press [Start].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Shortcut to Func.] key.
DYG403
To make the [Shortcut to Func.] key enable ID card copy mode for the current job, [Shortcut to
Function] under [Admin. Tools] must be set to [ID Card Copy Mode]. You can also assign the
setting using Web Image Monitor.
For [Shortcut to Function], see page 310 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Fourline LCD Panel Model)".
2. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
3. Place the original with the front side faced down in the upper-left corner of the
exposure glass.
DYH502
4. Press the [Start] key.
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass
appears on the display.
5. Place the original on the exposure glass with the back side faced down and with the
top to the rear of the machine, and then press the [Start] key again.
133
4. Copying Originals
• Depending on the thickness of the card, shadows may appear around the edges of the copy of the
card.
• For the ID card copy function, you can set the machine to print a line in the middle of the printed
paper. Specify [Center Line] in [ID Card Setting] under [Copier Features] if you are using the touch
panel model, or specify [ID Card Center Line] in [ID Card Settings] under [Copier Features] if you
are using the four-line LCD panel model.
• You can change the scanning size for the ID card function. Specify [Card Size] in [ID Card Setting]
under [Copier Features] if you are using the touch panel model, or specify [ID Card Size] in [ID
Card Settings] under [Copier Features] if you are using the four-line LCD panel model.
• After you load the originals, press the [Start] key within the time specified in [System Reset Timer] or
[System Auto Reset Timer]. Otherwise, the job is canceled. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310 "Administrator
Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Regardless of the machine's reduction or enlargement ratio setting, an ID card copy will always be
made at 100%.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
134
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying
This section describes how to specify image density and scan quality for the current job.
Adjusting Image Density
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the printout.
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Text/Photo].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired density level, and then press [OK].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Density] key.
DYG320
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK]
key.
135
4. Copying Originals
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always make copies with a specific
density level. For details, see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)" or page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Selecting the Document Type According to Original
There are three document types:
Text/Photo
Select this when the original contains both text and photographs or pictures.
Text
Select this when the original contains only text and no photographs or pictures.
Photo
Select this when the original contains only photographs or pictures. Use this mode for the following
types of original:
• Photographs
• Pages that are entirely or mainly photographs or pictures, such as magazine pages.
136
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Text/Photo].
4. Select the desired document type, and then press [OK].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.
DYG323
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired document type, and then press the [OK]
key.
• You can change the machine's default [Original Type] setting to always make copies with a
specific document type. For details, see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)" or page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
137
4. Copying Originals
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
138
5. Scanning Originals
This chapter describes how to specify settings and use the scanner function.
What You Can Do with the Scanner Function
Send Scanned Documents to a Folder on a Client Computer
For details, see "Basic Operation of Scan to Folder".
Documents
Specify a destination
and start scanning
Files are sent directly
to shared folders
Send Scanned Documents by E-mail
For details, see "Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail".
Documents
Specify a e-mail address
and start scanning
Distribute the document as a file
attached to an e-mail
Scanning Documents from Smart Organizing Monitor or a Client Computer
For details, see “Scanning from Smart Organizing Monitor” or "Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning".
Specify scan settings and start scanning
Scanned data is displayed on the computer screen
Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device
For details, see "Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device".
Documents
Specify scan settings
and start scanning
Scanned files are saved in the
USB flash memory device
139
5. Scanning Originals
Scanner Mode Screen
This section provides information about the screen in scanner mode.
When using the touch panel model
1
2
3
4
8
5
7
6
DUE313
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Email / Folder / FTP / USB
Press these tabs to switch between the [Email] screen, [Scan to Folder] screen, [Scan to FTP] screen, and
[Scan to USB] screen.
• When [Email] is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When [Folder] is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
• When [FTP] is selected, you can send scanned documents to an FTP server.
• When [USB] is selected, you can save scanned files to the USB flash memory device inserted into
the machine.
3. Favorite item icon
Press to register current settings to a favorite item.
4. Original Settings
Allows you to specify original settings.
5. Scan Settings
Allows you to specify scan settings.
6. Resend
Press this to specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.
7. Address Book
Allows you to recall destinations registered in the machine.
140
Scanner Mode Screen
8. E-mail icon
Indicates that the [Email] screen is displayed.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1
2
3
Ready
Specify Address
3 0 0 x 300dpi A4
Scn Size
Dest.
DYG396
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Current settings
Displays the current scanning mode and scan settings.
• When "Specify Address" is displayed:
Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Folder functions can be used.
3. Selection key items
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under the
administrator settings. For [Function Priority], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Fourline LCD Panel Model)".
141
5. Scanning Originals
Registering Scan Destinations
This section describes how to register scan destinations in the Address Book. To send scanned files to an
e-mail address (Scan to E-mail), FTP server (Scan to FTP), or a shared folder on a network computer
(Scan to Folder), you must first register the destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the
Address Book data periodically.
• Depending on your network environment, the Scan to FTP and Scan to Folder functions may
require a user name and password to be correctly entered in the destination information. In such
cases, after registering destinations, check that the user name and password are correctly entered
by sending test documents to those destinations.
The Address Book can contain up to 100 entries, including 8 Quick Dial entries.
Destinations registered as Quick Dial entries can be selected by pressing the corresponding button in the
Address Book.
However, Quick Dial is available for the touch panel model only.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register varies depending on the destination type. For details, see the
tables below.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
142
Registering Scan Destinations
Scan to E-mail Settings
Item
Setting
Description
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Name
Required
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Destination E-mail Address
Required
E-mail address of the destination. Can contain up to
64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Optional
If you enter an e-mail address in [Notification E-mail
Address], that address is used as the sender's e-mail
address. If you leave [Notification E-mail Address]
blank, the e-mail address specified in [Device E-mail
Address] on the [SMTP] tab is used as the sender's email address. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Subject
Required
Subject of the e-mail. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Optional
Name of e-mail sender. The name specified here will
be shown under "From" or a similar field of the
recipient's email application. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Optional
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
Sender's Name
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
143
5. Scanning Originals
Item
File Format (Black & White)
Original
Setting
Optional
Optional
Description
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
This item is available for the touch panel model only.
Scan Size
Optional
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 51/2, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 ×
14, 16K, or custom size.
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Resolution
Optional
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Density
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
button.
is the lightest, and
is
the darkest.
Scan to FTP Settings
Item
Quick Dial Number
144
Setting
Optional
Description
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Registering Scan Destinations
Item
Setting
Description
Name
Required
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Hostname or IP Address
Required
Name or IP address of the FTP server. Can contain up
to 64 characters.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Optional
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Black & White)
Optional
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
FTP User Name
Optional
User name for logging in to the FTP server. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
FTP Password
Optional
Password for logging in to the FTP server. Can contain
up to 32 characters.
Directory
Optional
Name of the FTP server directory where scanned files
are stored. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Optional
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Original
Optional
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
This item is available for the touch panel model only.
Scan Size
Optional
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 51/2, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 ×
14, 16K, or custom size.
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Resolution
Density
Optional
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
button.
is the lightest, and
is
the darkest.
145
5. Scanning Originals
Item
Connection Test
Setting
-
Description
A connection test is performed to check whether the
specified FTP server exists.
Scan to Folder Settings
Item
146
Setting
Description
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Name
Required
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Service Name
Required
Path to the directory where scanned files will be stored.
Consists of the IP address or name of the destination
computer (can contain up to 64 characters), and name
of the shared folder (can contain up to 32 characters).
Domain
Optional
Specify the name of the domain to which the computer
belongs. Can contain up to 15 characters.
Login User Name
Optional
User name for logging in to the destination computer.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
Login Password
Optional
Password for logging in to the destination computer.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
Registering Scan Destinations
Item
Setting
Description
Directory
Optional
Directory within the shared folder for storing scanned
files. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Optional
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Optional
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Black & White)
Optional
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
Original
Optional
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
This item is available for the touch panel model only.
Scan Size
Optional
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 51/2, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 ×
14, 16K, or custom size.
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Resolution
Optional
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Density
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
button.
is the lightest, and
is
the darkest.
Connection Test
-
A connection test is performed to check whether the
specified FTP server exists.
• To send files via e-mail, SMTP and DNS settings must be configured properly.
• If you are using the Scan to E-mail function, select a time zone according to your geographic
location to send email with correct transmission date and time.
• To send files to an FTP server or computer, the user name, password, and directory must be
configured properly.
147
5. Scanning Originals
• On a network that uses a DNS server, specify a computer name in [Service Name] and the name
of the domain to which the computer belongs in [Domain]. In this case, also configure the DNS
related settings using Web Image Monitor.
• The Scan to Folder destination must operate on one of the following operating systems: Windows
Vista/7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016, or OS X 10.10 or
later.
• Scan destinations cannot be registered using the control panel.
Modifying Scan Destinations
This section describes how to modify the information of registered destinations.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Scan Destination].
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
5. Modify settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
• You can unassign a Quick Dial entry from the [Quick Dial Destination] page. To do this, select the
desired entry, click [Delete], and then click [Apply] again on a confirmation page.
• If you are using the touch panel model, the machine will notify you if the destination you want to
modify is set as a forwarding destination of received faxes. For details about fax forwarding
settings, see page 338 "Fax Tab (Only When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Deleting Scan Destinations
This section describes how to delete registered destinations.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Scan Destination].
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.
4. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].
5. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
148
Registering Scan Destinations
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
• If you are using the touch panel model, the machine will notify you if the destination you want to
delete is set as a forwarding destination of received faxes. If you delete the destination anyway,
reconfigure the fax forwarding setting. For details about fax forwarding settings, see page 338
"Fax Tab (Only When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
149
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
This section explains the preparations and procedures to send scanned documents to a folder on a client
computer.
After following the procedures below, you can send scanned documents from the machine to a shared
folder on a client computer.
Print the check sheet.
Confirm the user name and computer name.
Create a shared folder on a computer.
Specify access privileges for the created shared
folder. *1
Register the shared folder to the machine's
Address Book.
Send scanned files to the shared folder.
*1 only Windows
• You can create the shared folder under Windows Vista or later, Windows Server 2008 or later,
and OS X 10.10 or later.
• Files can be sent via SMB using the SMB (139/TCP, 137/UDP) or CIFS (445/TCP) protocol.
• Files can be sent via SMB (139/TCP, 137/UDP) in a NetBIOS over TCP/IP environment only.
• Files cannot be sent via SMB in a NetBEUI environment.
Printing the Check Sheet
Print out the following check sheet. Write on the check sheet the settings for the computer to which you
will send documents.
For details about how to use the check sheet to make a list of the setting values, see page 151 "
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name" and page 153 " Creating a Shared Folder on a
Computer".
150
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
• After registering scan destinations to the Address Book, discard the completed check sheet to
prevent leakage of personal information.
Check Sheet
No.
Check Item (Entry Example)
Entry Column
Computer name
(ex. YamadaPC)
[1]
Active settings of DHCP server
([Yes] or [No])
Computer's IP address
(ex. 192.168.0.152)
[2]
Domain Name/Working
Group Name
(ex. ABCD-NET)
USERDNSDOMAIN
USERDOMAIN
Computer's user name
(ex. TYamada)
[3]
Computer's login password
(ex. Administrator)
[4]
Computer's shared folder name
(ex. scan)
• Depending on the network environment, USERDNSDOMAIN or USERDOMAIN may not be
displayed. Write the domain name or working group name in the check sheet.
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name When Running Microsoft Windows
Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System], and then click [Command Prompt].
151
5. Scanning Originals
2. Enter the command "ipconfig /all", and then press the [Enter] key.
3. Confirm the name of the computer, the active settings of the DHCP server, and the IPv4
address, and then write them in [1] on the check sheet.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].
The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4 address of the computer.
Active settings of DHCP server are displayed under [DHCP Enabled].
4. Next, enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key.
Be sure to put a space between "set" and "user".
5. Confirm the domain name/working group name and the user name, and then write them
in [2] on the check sheet.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].
Confirm the computer's login password and write it in [3] on the check sheet.
Next, create a shared folder on a computer. For details about creating a shared folder, see page 153
" Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer".
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, it might be possible to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that for greater security you
select a user name that has a password.
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name When Running OS X
Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to. Confirm the
values, and then write them on the check sheet.
1. On the Apple menu, click [About This Mac].
The computer's information screen appears.
2. Click [System Report...].
3. In the left pane, click [Software], and then confirm the computer name and user name
under "System Software Overview:".
The computer name is displayed next to [Computer Name].
The user name is displayed next to [User Name].
On the check sheet, write the computer name in [1] and the user name in [2].
Next, create a shared folder on a computer. For details about creating a shared folder, see page 153
" Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer".
152
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, you might be able to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that you select a user name
that has a password.
• To confirm the IP address on the Apple menu, click [System Preferences...], and then click
[Network] on the System Preferences window. Then click [Ethernet]. The address displayed in the IP
address field is the IP address of the computer.
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Microsoft Windows
Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 10 and participating in a domain is used as an example.
• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.
• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.
1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer. Write the folder name in [4] on the check sheet.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, select [Advanced Sharing...].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
If the [Enter network credentials] screen appears, enter the user name and password.
In the [Select Users or Groups] window, add groups or users to whom you want to grant access. In
the following procedure, the procedure to give access privileges to users that you wrote on the
check sheet is used as an example.
8. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to (the name
you wrote in [2] on the check sheet), and then click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
153
5. Scanning Originals
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user (the name you wrote in [2] on
the check sheet), and then, in the [Allow] column of the permissions list, select either the
[Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK].
14. Click [Close].
If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access it,
proceed to page 155 " Specifying Access Privileges for the Created Shared Folder".
If not, proceed to page 155 " Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book".
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running OS X
The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running OS X, and how
to confirm the computer's information. OS X 10.11 is used in these examples.
• You must log in as an administrator to create a shared folder.
1. Create the folder that you want to send scan files to.
Write the folder name into [4] in the check sheet.
2. On the Apple menu, click [System Preferences...].
3. Click [Sharing].
4. Select the [File Sharing] check box.
5. Click [Options...].
6. Select the [Share files and folders using SMB] check box.
7. Select the account that will be used to access the shared folder.
8. If the [Authenticate] screen appears, enter the password for the account, click [OK], and
then click [Done].
9. Under the [Shared Folders:] list, click [ ].
10. Select the folder you have created, and then click [Add].
11. Make sure that the permissions for the user who will access this folder are set to [Read
&Write].
Next, register scan destinations. For details about registering scan destinations, see page 155 "
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book".
154
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
Specifying Access Privileges for the Created Shared Folder
If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:
1. Right-click the folder created in Step 3, and then click [Properties].
2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
If the [Enter network credentials] screen appears, enter the user name and password.
4. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Close].
Next, register scan destinations. For details about registering scan destinations, see page 155 "
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book".
• If you are creating a shared folder for the first time on this computer, you must enable the file
sharing function. For details, see Windows Help.
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book
Register scan destinations using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Folder].
4. Register information as necessary.
Register the information entered in the table on page 150 " Printing the Check Sheet". For details,
see page 142 "Registering Scan Destinations".
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
155
5. Scanning Originals
Preparations for Scan to Folder are complete.
For details about sending scanned files to the destination you registered to the Address Book, see
page 156 " Send Scanned Files to a Shared Folder".
• If the machine fails to transfer the file, confirm the following items.
• Destination is registered to the Address Book correctly.
• Set the security software or firewall of the destination computer to off and try the job again.
For details about security software of the firewall settings, contact your network administrator.
• If there is more than one destination computer, test the job with other computers. Compare the
settings with the computer which succeeded to transfer the file. For details, contact your
network administrator.
• When there is not enough disk space on the destination computer, the machine may fail to
transfer the file.
Send Scanned Files to a Shared Folder
Send scanned files to the shared folder registered in Step 5.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Register the scan destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 142 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• With the four-line LCD panel model, when a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine,
scanned documents will be stored in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB
flash memory devices inserted into the machine.
When using the touch panel model
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
156
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
2. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [Folder] tab.
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Select the desired destination by pressing the small square.
A check mark appears in the small square. Press the small square again to cancel the
selection.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
157
5. Scanning Originals
9. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
10. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
2. Press the [Scanner] key, and then select [Dest.].
DYG326
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under [Admin.
Tools] is set to [Select Scanner Address]. For [Shortcut to Function], see page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
3. Make sure [Search Address Book] is selected, and then press the [OK] key.
4. If you want to search for a specific entry by its name, enter the first letters of the
name using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key. Each time you enter a
character, the display changes to show the matching name.
5. Search for the desired destination by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll the Address
Book, and then press the [OK] key.
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically
according to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary,
you can change the scan settings using the control panel. For scan settings, see page 292
"Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
158
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
6. Press the [Start] key.
DYG334
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
7. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
8. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• With the four-line LCD panel model, you can also specify a destination using [Resend]. For details,
see page 169 "Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend] (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
159
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail
This section explains the preparations and procedures to send scanned documents as a file attached to
an e-mail.
After following the procedures below, you can send scanned documents to the specified e-mail address.
Configure SMTP server and DNS settings.
Register the destination e-mail address in the Address Book.
Send scanned files by e-mail.
Configuring SMTP and DNS Settings
To send files via e-mail, SMTP and DNS settings must be configured properly.
For details about SMTP server information, contact the network administrator of your Internet service
provider.
Configure SMTP and DNS information using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Network Settings].
3. Click the [DNS] tab.
4. Register information as necessary.
For details, see page 346 "Configuring the Network Settings".
5. Click [OK].
6. Click the [SMTP] tab.
7. Register information as necessary.
For details, see page 346 "Configuring the Network Settings".
8. Click [OK].
9. Close the web browser.
Next, register the destination e-mail address to the Address Book. For details, see page 161 "
Registering Destination E-mail Addresses to the Address Book".
160
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail
Registering Destination E-mail Addresses to the Address Book
Configure the destination information using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [E-mail Address].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register are the following items. For details, see page 142 "Registering
Scan Destinations".
• Name
• Destination E-mail Address
• Subject
If you enter an e-mail address in [Notification E-mail Address], that address is used as the sender's
e-mail address. If you leave [Notification E-mail Address] blank, the e-mail address specified in
[Device E-mail Address] on the [SMTP] tab is used as the sender's e-mail address.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
Preparations for Scan to E-mail are complete.
For details about sending files to the registered destinations, see page 161 " Sending Scanned Files
by E-mail".
Sending Scanned Files by E-mail
This section explains how to send scanned files to the destinations registered in Step 2.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Register the scan destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 142 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• With the four-line LCD panel model, when a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine,
scanned documents will be stored in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB
flash memory devices inserted into the machine.
161
5. Scanning Originals
When using the touch panel model
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
2. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [Email] tab.
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Select the desired destination by pressing the small square.
A check mark appears in the small square. Press the small square again to cancel the
selection.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
162
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
9. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
10. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
2. Press the [Scanner] key, and then select [Dest.].
DYG326
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under [Admin.
Tools] is set to [Select Scanner Address]. For [Shortcut to Function], see page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
3. Make sure [Search Address Book] is selected, and then press the [OK] key.
If you want to search for a specific entry by its name, enter the first letters of the name using
the number keys, and then press the [OK] key. Each time you enter a character, the display
changes to show the matching name.
4. Search for the desired destination by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll the Address
Book, and then press the [OK] key.
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically
according to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary,
you can change the scan settings using the control panel. For scan settings, see page 292
"Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
163
5. Scanning Originals
5. Press the [Start] key.
DYG334
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
6. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• With the touch panel model, you can also specify a destination using [Resend]. For details, see
page 169 "Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend] (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
164
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP
This section explains the preparations and instructions to send scanned documents to an FTP server.
After following the procedures below, you can send scanned documents to an FTP server.
Configure FTP server settings.
Send scanned files to the FTP server.
Configuring FTP Server Settings
To send files to an FTP server, configure FTP server settings properly. For details about FTP servers,
contact your network administrator.
Configure FTP server settings using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [FTP].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register are the following items. For details, see page 142 "Registering
Scan Destinations".
• Name
• Hostname or IP Address
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
Preparations for Scan to FTP are complete.
For details about sending files to the registered destinations, see page 165 " Sending Scanned Files
to an FTP Server".
Sending Scanned Files to an FTP Server
This section explains how to send scanned files to the destinations registered in Step 1.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
165
5. Scanning Originals
• Register the scan destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 142 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• With the four-line LCD panel model, when a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine,
scanned documents will be stored in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB
flash memory devices inserted into the machine.
When using the touch panel model
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
2. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [FTP] tab.
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Select the desired destination by pressing the small square.
A check mark appears in the small square. Press the small square again to cancel the
selection.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
166
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
9. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
10. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals"
2. Press the [Scanner] key, and then select [Dest.].
DYG326
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under [Admin.
Tools] is set to [Select Scanner Address]. For [Shortcut to Function], see page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
3. Make sure [Search Address Book] is selected, and then press the [OK] key.
If you want to search for a specific entry by its name, enter the first letters of the name using
the number keys, and then press the [OK] key. Each time you enter a character, the display
changes to show the matching name.
4. Search for the desired destination by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll the Address
Book, and then press the [OK] key.
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically
according to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary,
167
5. Scanning Originals
you can change the scan settings using the control panel. For scan settings, see page 292
"Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
5. Press the [Start] key.
DYG334
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
6. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
7. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• With the touch panel model, you can also specify a destination using [Resend]. For details, see
page 169 "Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend] (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
168
Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend] (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend]
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)
This section describes how to specify a destination using [Resend].
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Using [Resend]
Press [Resend] to select the last used destination.
• When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change
the scan settings using the control panel. For details, see page 187 "Specifying Scan Settings for
Scanning".
• [Resend] is not effective for the first scan job after the machine is turned on.
• You can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear the destination.
169
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a
USB Flash Memory Device
This section explains basic operations of Scan to USB. Files are saved to the USB flash memory device
inserted into the machine.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• This machine does not support the use of external USB hubs.
• Not all types of USB flash memory devices are supported.
• When using Scan to USB, set [Save Scn Data to USB] to [Active]. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310 "Administrator
Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
When using the touch panel model
1. Insert the USB flash memory device into the USB port.
DYH234
2. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
170
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device
4. Press the [USB] tab.
5. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
Specify the scanning settings as necessary. For details of specifying the scanning settings, see
page 187 "Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning".
6. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
Depending on the machine's setting, you will see the following screen on the display.
• When in halftone black-and-white scanning mode:
• When in color or gray scale black-and-white scanning mode:
7. Press the appropriate selection key according to the desired file format, and then
press [OK].
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
171
5. Scanning Originals
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
8. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
9. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
10. Wait until "Completed the Process" is displayed on the screen.
Scanned files are saved in the root directory of the USB flash memory device.
11. Remove the USB flash memory device from the machine.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Insert the USB flash memory device into the USB port.
DYH503
The scanner screen appears on the display.
Wait until [Save Scn Data to USB] appears on the display. The time before the message
appears differs depending on the type of USB flash memory device.
2. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
Specify the scanning settings as necessary. For details of specifying the scanning settings, see
page 187 "Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning".
172
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device
3. Press the [Start] key.
DYG334
4. Select the file format by pressing the corresponding selection key.
If the [Limitless Scan] setting under [Scan Settings] is enabled, you may see the following
screen on the display when scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
5. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass,
and then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
6. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
7. Wait until "Completed the Process" is displayed on the screen.
Scanned files are saved in the root directory of the USB flash memory device.
8. Remove the USB flash memory device from the machine.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• You can configure the machine to perform black-and-white scanning in halftone or grayscale by
changing [Scanning Mode] setting under the scan settings. For details about [Scanning Mode], see
page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 292
"Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• If the [Limitless Scan] setting under the scan settings is enabled, you can place originals on the
exposure glass repeatedly in a single scan procedure. For details about [Limitless Scan], see
page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 292
"Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
173
5. Scanning Originals
• If the [Single/ Multi Page] or [File Type] setting under scanner settings is set to [Multi-page], you
can scan multiple pages to create a single PDF or TIFF file containing all pages. However, if the file
format is JPEG, a single-page file will be created for every page scanned. For details about
[Single/ Multi Page], see page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)" or page 292 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the scan job will be put on hold. To resume the current job, remove
the jammed paper and scan the originals again starting from the jammed page. For details about
how to remove the paper jammed in the ADF, see page 414 "Removing Scanning Jams".
174
Scanning from Smart Organizing Monitor
Scanning from Smart Organizing Monitor
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
1. Place originals.
2. On the [Start] menu, click [SP 330_3710_Series Software Utilities].
3. Click [Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 330_3710_Series].
Smart Organizing Monitor starts.
4. Click the [User Tools] tab.
5. Click [Scan].
The dialog box appears.
6. On the [General] tab, specify settings according to the types of originals and scanning,
and the orientation of the original.
7. On the [Options] tab, specify the file format and the directory to save the file.
175
5. Scanning Originals
8. Click [Scan].
9. After all originals are scanned, click [Exit].
Scanner Settings You Can Configure for Smart Organizing Monitor
The following explains the setting options you can configure when Smart Organizing Monitor is used for
scanning.
[General] tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
DYG388
1. Original:
Select [Exposure Glass] to scan from the exposure glass or [Automatic Document Feeder] to scan from
the ADF.
2. Original type
According to your original, select a setting from the list of options detailed below, or select [Custom...] to
configure your own scan settings. [Scn. Mode], [Resolution], and [Size] under [Scan Configuration] will
change according to the original type setting you selected here.
• When using the exposure glass:
[Editing Text (OCR)]
[Faxing, Filing, or Copying]
[Black and White Photo]
[Color Document-Faster]
[Color Document-Better Quality]
176
Scanning from Smart Organizing Monitor
[Custom...]
• When using the ADF:
[ADF-Faster]
[ADF-Better]
[ADF-Gray]
[Custom...]
3. Scn. Mode:
Select from full color, grayscale, or black-and-white.
4. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list. Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and
scanning time.
Select from 100, 200, 300, or 600 dpi.
5. Size:
Select the scanning size.
When [Exposure Glass] is selected in [Original:], you can change the scanning size with your mouse in
the preview area. Also, after selecting [User defined], you can select the unit of measure from [cm],
[inches], or [pixels].
6. Duplex (only when using the touch panel model)
Appears only when [Automatic Document Feeder] is selected in [Original:]. Select the check box when
scanning both sides of the original, and then specify the orientation.
[Options] tab
1
2
3
DYG389
177
5. Scanning Originals
1. Scan To:
Specify the directory to save the file.
2. File Name Prefix:
Specify the file name prefix. Year, month, date, and time are consecutively shown after the prefix.
For example, if [File Name Prefix] is "Scan" and the original is scanned at 10 o'clock on January 1,
2018, the file name will be "Scan_20180101_100000". If you leave [File Name Prefix] blank, the file
name will be "20180101_1000000". If a file with the same name already exists, a branch number is
attached to the end of the file name, and the file name will be "Scan_20180101_100000_01".
3. Format:
Select the file format of the scanned document from JPEG, TIFF, or PDF.
178
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning
This section describes the basic TWAIN scanning operation.
TWAIN scanning is possible if a TWAIN-compatible application is running on your computer.
DYG390
1. Your Computer (TWAIN driver already installed)
Instruct the machine to start scanning the original that is set on the machine.
2. This Machine
The original that is set on the machine is scanned, and its data is sent to a client computer.
Using TWAIN scanner
This section describes the preparations for using the TWAIN scanner.
• You can use TWAIN scanning on a Windows operating system.
• To use the TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver, which is on the supplied CD-ROM.
• To use the TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application must be installed.
To use the machine as a TWAIN scanner, first do the following:
• Install the TWAIN driver.
• Install a TWAIN-compliant application.
TWAIN scanning
TWAIN scanning is possible if your computer is running a TWAIN-compatible application.
The following is a general scan procedure with the TWAIN driver, so the actual operation may differ
depending on the applications you use. For details, see the application's Help.
1. Start a TWAIN-compliant application.
179
5. Scanning Originals
2. Place originals.
3. Open the Scanner Control dialog box.
The Scanner Control dialog box is used to control the scanner using the TWAIN driver. To open the
Scanner Control dialog box, select the correct TWAIN scanner using the TWAIN-compliant
application. For details, see the application's Help.
4. Make settings according to such factors as the type of original, type of scanning, and
orientation of the original.
For details, see the TWAIN driver Help.
5. In the Scanner Control dialog box, click [Scan].
Depending on the security setting, if you press [Scan], a dialog box for entering the user name and
password may appear.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then click [Continue].
If there are no more originals to be scanned, click [Complete].
Settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DYG391
1. Scanner:
Select the scanner you want to use. The scanner you select becomes the default scanner. Click [Refresh] to
discover all available scanners connected via USB or the network.
2. Original:
Select [Reflective] to scan from the exposure glass, or [Automatic Document Feeder] to scan from the ADF.
180
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning
3. Original type
According to your original, select a setting from the list of options detailed below, or select [Custom...] to
configure your own scan settings. [Mode], [Resolution], and [Size] under [Scan Configuration] will change
according to the original type setting you selected here.
• When using the exposure glass:
[Editing Text(OCR)]
[Faxing, Filing, or Copying]
[Black and White Photo]
[Color Document-Fast]
[Color Document-Better Quality]
[Custom...]
• When using the ADF:
[ADF-Faster]
[ADF-Better]
[ADF-Gray]
[Custom...]
4. Mode:
Select from full color, grayscale, or black-and-white.
5. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list. If you select [User defined], enter a resolution value directly in the edit box.
Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and scanning time.
Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set.
• When using the exposure glass:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 dpi, User defined
• When using the ADF:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi, User defined
6. Size:
Select the scanning size. If you select [User defined], enter the scanning size directly in the edit box. Also, you
can change the scanning size with your mouse in the preview area. You can select the unit of measure from
[cm], [inches], or [pixels]. Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set. For details, see
the TWAIN Help.
7. Scan task: (when using the exposure glass)
Displays up to 10 previously used scan areas. To remove a scan task, select the number of the task, and then
click [Remove]. You can select [AutoCrop] to let the scanner automatically detect the size of your original.
When you use the touch panel model and select [Automatic Document Feeder] for [Original:], [Duplex]
appears instead of [Scan task:]. Select this check box when you placing two-sided originals in the ADF.
• If the scan data is larger than the memory capacity, an error message appears and scanning is
canceled. If this happens, specify a lower resolution and scan the original again.
181
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation for WIA Scanning
WIA allows computers running Windows Vista SP1 or later versions of Windows operating systems and
Windows Server 2008 or later to perform scanning over a network.
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
2. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] under [Windows System].
3. Click [View devices and printers].
4. Right-click the icon of the printer model you want to use, and then click [Start scan] to
open the dialog box for the scan settings.
5. In the dialog box, configure the scan settings as required, and then click [Scan].
6. Click [Import].
182
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning
This section describes the basic ICA scanning operation.
You can use the ICA scanner over both USB and network connections.
Installing the ICA Driver
1. Download the driver from the web site.
2. Open the package file.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Using ICA Scanner
This section describes the preparations and procedure for using the ICA scanner.
To use the network connection, configure the network setting.
Install an ICA-compliant application.
ICA Scanning
Setting procedures using OS X 10.11 are shown as an example. The actual procedure may differ
depending on the OS X version you are using.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
2. Open the Finder.
3. Open the Applications folder.
4. Double-click [Image Capture].
5. Select a scanner you want to use from the list.
• For a USB connection, select one from the "DEVICES" list.
• For a network connection, select one from the "SHARED" list.
183
5. Scanning Originals
Settings you can configure in the ICA dialog box
1 2
3
4
5
7
10
11
6
8
9
12
DYG392
1. Scan Mode:
Select where the original is placed.
• Flatbed
If the original is placed on the exposure glass, select [Flatbed].
• Document Feeder
If the original is placed in the ADF, select [Document Feeder].
2. Kind:
Set the type of original to [Text], [Black & White], or [Color].
[Text] is suitable for scanning originals containing mainly text.
3. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list.
Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and scanning time.
Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set.
• When using the exposure glass:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 dpi
• When using the ADF:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi
4. Size:
Specify the original paper size.
The [Use Custom Size] check box appears when [Flatbed] is selected in [Scan Mode:]. If you select this check
box, specify the following items also:
• Rotation Angle:
You can specify how many degrees to rotate the scan image clockwise.
• Auto Selection:
• Detect Separate Items
184
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning
You can scan multiple originals together and store each scan image as a separate file.
• Detect Enclosing Box
You can scan multiple originals placed on the exposure glass and store their scan images as a
single file.
5. Orientation
Select the orientation for originals placed in the ADF or on the exposure glass.
This item does not appear when the [Use Custom Size] check box is selected.
When you use the touch panel model and select [Document Feeder] for [Scan Mode:], [Duplex] appears
under [Orientation:]. Select this check box when you placing two-sided originals in the ADF.
6. Scan To:
Select where to store the scan data.
7. Name:
Name the scan data.
8. Format:
Select the format of the scan data.
• TIFF
• PNG
• GIF
• PDF
• JPEG
• JPEG 2000
• BMP
9. Image Correction:
By selecting [Manual], you can adjust settings such as brightness and contrast.
10. Hide Details
Click to hide the settings.
11. Overview
Click to preview the scan image.
12. Scan
Click to start scanning.
• If the scan data is larger than the memory capacity, an error message appears and scanning is
canceled. If this happens, specify a lower resolution and scan the original again.
185
5. Scanning Originals
About SANE Scanning
This machine can be used as a SANE scanner.
Supported Linux distributions are as follows:
• openSUSE 13.1/13.2
• Ubuntu 16.04LTS/16.10
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6/7
186
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according to the
information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change the scan
settings for the current job using the control panel.
• The machine maintains the preset scan settings for the current destination until the machine returns
to standby mode.
• Changing the preset scan settings for the current destination does not change the information
registered in the Address Book.
• If you specify the last used destination, the preset scan settings become effective again, even if you
have changed the settings for the previous job.
Specifying the Scanning Size According to the Size of the Original
This section describes how to specify the scanning size according to the size of the current original.
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Scan Setting].
4. Press [Scan Size...].
5. Select the size of the original, and then press [OK].
If you selected anything other than [Custom Size], you do not need to perform the remaining
steps of the procedure.
6. Select [mm] or [inch].
7. Press [Set Width...].
8. Enter the width, and then press [OK].
187
5. Scanning Originals
9. Press [Set Length...].
10. Enter the length, and then press [OK].
11. Confirm the scan size you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press [Scn Size].
Ready
Specify Address
3 0 0 x 3 00 dp i A 4
Sc n Size
Dest.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the size of the original, and then press the [OK] key.
If you selected anything other than [Custom Size], you do not need to perform the remaining
steps of the procedure.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [mm] or [inch], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Enter the width using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
5. Enter the length using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
• You can change the machine's default [Scan Size] setting to always scan originals with a specific
scanning size. For details, see page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)" or page 292 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Adjusting Image Density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
188
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the scanned image.
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Scan Setting].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired density level, and then press [OK].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Density] key.
DYG320
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK]
key.
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.
For details, see page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or
page 292 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
189
5. Scanning Originals
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Specifying Resolution
This section describes how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.
There are six resolution settings. The higher the resolution, the higher the quality but greater the file size.
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Scan Setting].
4. Press [Resolution...].
5. Select the desired resolution, and then press [OK].
6. Confirm the resolution you selected is displayed, and then press [OK].
190
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.
DYG323
2. Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] key to select the desired resolution, and then press the
[OK] key.
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution
level. For details, see page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)"
or page 292 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] or [System
Auto Reset Timer] while the initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)" or page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
191
5. Scanning Originals
192
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
This chapter describes how to use the fax function and specify the settings.
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF.
What You Can Do with the Fax Function
Forward received faxes to receive them wherever you are
By forwarding received faxes to an e-mail address or a folder, you can receive them anytime,
anywhere you are.
For details, see page 227 "Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory".
DYG526
Send faxes by data to save paper
By using a LAN-Fax Driver, you can send documents from your computer without printing them.
For details, see page 217 "Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)".
DYG527
193
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Fax Setting Workflows
This section explains the preparations and procedures to send fax documents to a folder on a client
computer.
After following the procedures below, you can send fax documents from the machine to a shared folder
on a client computer.
Set the date and time.
Register the fax number and fax name of the
machine.
Connect the machine to a telephone line.
Select the telephone line type and telephone
network connection type.
Set the outside line access number. *1
Specify the reception mode.
*1 Specify when using an extension line or a PBX.
Procedure
Reference
See Setup Guide.
For details about selecting reception modes, see page 223 "Selecting
Reception Mode".
194
Fax Setting Workflows
• After the initial setup, you can change settings in the [Administrator Tools] menu. For details about
changing settings, see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
195
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Fax Mode Screen
This section provides information about the screen in fax mode.
Screen in standby mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
8
9
11
12
10
DYG528
1. Fax
Displays the [Fax] (
) screen. You can specify fax destinations.
2. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
3. [On Hook]
Allows you to dial while listening to the tone from the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the
connection.
4. [Immed. TX]
Press to select Immediate Transmission mode. For details, see page 203 "Selecting Transmission Mode".
5. Favorite item icon
Press to register current settings to a favorite item.
6. [Tx File]
Press to display the list of transmission files in memory.
7. [Rx File]
Press to display the list of received files in memory.
8. Current TX settings
Displays the current density, original, and resolution settings.
9. [TX Settings]
Press to specify scan settings.
196
Fax Mode Screen
10. [Redial]
Press to select the last used destination.
While entering a destination, press this key to insert a pause.
11. [Manual Entry]
Press to specify destinations manually.
12. [Address Book]
Press to select destinations registered in the machine.
13. Entered number
Displays the entered number of a destination.
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under
[Administrator Tools]. For [Function Priority], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• The display format for time and date can be specified in [Set Date/Time] under [Administrator
Tools]. For [Set Date/Time], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)".
• If the Alert indicator flashes on the initial fax display, press the [Home] key, press the [Status] icon,
and check the displayed message.
197
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Registering Fax Destinations
This section describes how to register fax destinations in the Address Book using the control panel. For
entering characters, see page 46 "Entering Characters (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
The Address Book can also be edited using Web Image Monitor.
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the
Address Book data periodically. For details about creating backup files, see page 363
"Configuring the Administrator Settings".
The Address Book can contain up to 108 entries (8 Quick Dial entries and 100 Speed Dial entries).
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. If you are requested to enter a password, the password using the number keys, and then
press [OK].
5. Select [Quick Dial List] or [Speed Dial List].
6. Select the number of Quick Dial List or Speed Dial List you want to register.
7. Press the box next to [Name:].
8. Enter the fax name, and then press [OK].
9. Press the box next to [Number:].
10. Enter the fax number, and then press [OK].
11. Confirm the setting, and then press [OK].
12. Press the [Home] key.
198
Registering Fax Destinations
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside
line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX Access
Number], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For
[Admin. Tools Lock], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
Modifying or deleting fax destinations
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
5. Select [Quick Dial List] or [Speed Dial List].
6. Select the number of Quick Dial List or Speed Dial List you want to modify or delete.
7. Press the box next to [Name:].
8. Enter the fax name, and then press [OK].
If you want to delete the fax name, press [ ] or [C] until the current name is deleted.
9. Press the box next to [Number:].
199
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
10. Enter the fax number, and then press [OK].
If you want to delete the fax number, press [ ] or [C] until the current number is deleted.
11. Confirm the setting, and then press [OK].
12. Press the [Home] key.
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Fax].
4. Select [Quick Dial Number] or [Speed Dial Number], and then select the registration
number from the list.
5. Register information as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
Fax destination settings
Item
200
Setting
Description
Quick Dial Number /
Speed Dial Number
Required
Select the number to which you want to register Quick
Dial or Speed Dial destination.
Name
Optional
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a fax
destination. Can contain up to 20 characters.
Registering Fax Destinations
Item
Setting
Description
Fax number of the destination. Can contain up to 40
characters.
Fax Number
Required
If the machine is connected to the telephone network
through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside line
access number specified in [PBX Access Number]
before the fax number. For [PBX Access Number], see
page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)".
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• For details about using Web Image Monitor, see page 327 "Configuring the Machine Using
Utilities".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside
line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX Access
Number], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Modifying fax destinations
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
If you modify the Speed Dial entry, proceed to Step 4.
3. Click [Fax Quick Dial Destination].
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
If you want to delete the entry, click [Delete].
5. Modify settings as necessary.
To delete the entry, confirm the entry you have selected.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
201
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
8. Close the web browser.
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination
If you want to prevent documents being sent to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to
prompt users twice for the destination, or to display the entered destination prior to transmission.
Re-entering a fax number to confirm destination
Enter the fax number again to confirm the destination is correct.
Transmission is disabled if the confirmation fax number does not match the first fax number. This function
helps prevent users accidentally sending faxes to the wrong destination.
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
5. Press [ ] twice.
6. Press [Fax No. Confirmation].
7. Select [On].
8. Press the [Home] key.
• A password for accessing the [Administrator Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
For [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
202
Sending a Fax
Sending a Fax
• It is recommended that you call the receiver and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
Selecting Transmission Mode
The following explains the transmission modes of the fax function and how to select them.
Types of transmission modes
There are two types of transmission:
• Memory transmission
• Immediate transmission
Selecting the transmission mode
Remove the original
quickly from the machine.
Which mode has priority?
Send documents
immediately.
How many fax numbers
does the destination
have?
Memory Transmission
Immediate Transmission
Multiple
Memory Transmission
Single
Immediate Transmission
Description of transmission modes
• Memory transmission
In this mode, the machine scans several originals into memory and sends them all at once. This
is convenient when you are in a hurry and want to remove the document from the machine. In
this mode, you can send a fax to multiple destinations. If the [Auto Redial] under [Transmission
Setting] is enabled, the machine redials the fax destination automatically when the line is busy
or a transmission error occurs. The number of redial attempts is set to two or three in fiveminute intervals, depending on the [Country] setting under [Administrator Tools]. You can
disable [Auto Redial] under [Fax Features]. For details, see page 247 "Fax Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Immediate transmission
In this mode, the machine scans the original and faxes it simultaneously. This is convenient
when you want to send an original quickly or when you want to check the destination you are
203
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
sending to. The original is not stored in memory. You can only specify one destination. If fax is
not received normally, an error message appears on the control panel.
Configuring the transmission mode
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [ ].
5. Select [Transmission Setting].
6. Press [Immediate TX].
7. Select [Off], [On], or [Next Fax Only].
For Memory Transmission, select [Off].
For Immediate Transmission, select [On] or [Next Fax Only].
8. Press the [Home] key.
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• If you specify fax original settings for a 2-sided original, place it in the ADF. You cannot send faxes
when placing the original on the exposure glass. You can specify fax original settings in two ways:
[Original Settings] under [TX Settings] on the [Fax] screen or [Fax Original] under [Transmission
Setting] in the [Fax Features] menu. For details about fax original settings, see page 247 "Fax
Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
204
Sending a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the originals, see page 89 "Placing Originals".
4. Select [Address Book], [Manual Entry], or [Redial].
If you select [Redial], confirm the destination, and then proceed to Step 7.
5. Enter the fax number (up to 40 characters), or specify a destination.
• For details about entering characters, see page 46 "Entering Characters (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• For details about specifying destinations, see page 209 "Specifying the Fax Destination".
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the
outside line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX
Access Number], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
6. Press [OK].
7. Press the [Start] key.
DYG336
• Depending on the machine's settings, you may be prompted to enter the fax number again if
you manually entered the destination fax number. In this case, re-enter the number within 60
seconds, and then press the [Start] key. If the fax numbers do not match, go back to Step 5.
205
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
For [Fax No. Confirmation], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• When using the exposure glass in Memory Transmission mode, you will be prompted to place
another original. In this case, proceed to the next step.
8. If you have more originals to scan, press [Yes] within 60 seconds, place the next original
on the exposure glass, and then press [OK]. Repeat this step until all originals are
scanned.
If you do not press [Yes] within 60 seconds, the machine will start to dial the destination.
9. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] or the [Start] key to start sending the
fax.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• You can specify multiple destinations and broadcast the fax you are sending. For sending a fax
using the broadcast function, see page 209 "Specifying the Fax Destination".
• When [Fax No. Confirmation] is set to [On], the machine prompts you to enter the fax number
twice only when you dial the destination manually. Destinations specified using the Speed Dial
function or [Redial] need not be confirmed. For details about [Fax No. Confirmation], see
page 202 "Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination".
• When in Memory Transmission mode, you can enable the [Auto Redial] setting under [Transmission
Setting] to set the machine to automatically redial the destination if the line is busy or an error
occurs during transmission. For [Auto Redial], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)".
• When in Memory Transmission mode, the machine's memory may become full while scanning the
originals. In this case, the screen prompts you to cancel the transmission or to send only the pages
that have been scanned successfully.
• You can scan 2-sided originals from the ADF in Memory Transmission mode. Specify how to scan
2-sided originals in the [Fax Original] setting under [Transmission Setting]. For [Fax Original], see
page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the jammed page has not been scanned properly. When the
machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, resend the fax starting from the jammed page. When
in Memory Transmission mode, scan the entire originals again. For details about removing paper
jammed in the ADF, see page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
206
Sending a Fax
• The machine can store up to 5 unsent fax jobs.
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
Canceling a transmission before the original is scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the [Start] key.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DYG330
Canceling a transmission while the original is being scanned
Use this procedure to cancel scanning or transmitting of the original while it is being scanned.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DYG330
2. Press [Fax Jobs] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
207
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Canceling a transmission after the original is scanned (while a transmission is in
progress)
Use this procedure to delete a file that is being sent after the original is scanned.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key while "Transmitting..." is displayed on the display.
DYG330
2. Press [Fax Jobs] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
• If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted as soon as you finish the
cancellation procedure. However, some pages of the document may already have been sent and
received at the other end.
• If the transmission finishes while this procedure is being processed, the transmission is not canceled.
• If you cancel sending a fax while broadcasting, only the fax to the current destination is canceled.
The fax will be sent to the subsequent destinations as normal. For details about sending a fax using
the broadcast function, see page 209 "Specifying the Fax Destination".
Canceling a transmission after the original is scanned (before a transmission starts)
Use this procedure to delete a file stored in memory before its transmission starts.
Use the following procedure to delete a file stored in memory (such as automatic redial) before its
transmission starts.
1. Confirm that the initial screen for Fax mode is shown on the display.
For details about the initial screen, see page 196 "Fax Mode Screen".
2. Press [Tx File].
3. Select the file you want to delete.
• To delete a file
Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete]. Press [Yes] when the message
appears.
• To delete all files
208
Sending a Fax
Press [Delete All]. Press [Yes] when the message appears.
• You cannot view files that are in the process of being sent.
• If you specify a broadcast task, all the unsent destinations are canceled.
Specifying the Fax Destination
Other than entering the destination fax number using the number keys, you can specify destinations
using the following functions:
• Quick Dial
• Speed Dial
• Broadcast function
• Redial function
Specifying the destination using Quick Dial
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. Press the [Quick Dial] tab.
5. Select the Quick Dial entry you want by pressing the small square.
A check mark appears in the small square. Press the small square again to cancel the selection.
6. Press [OK].
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report. For printing the Quick
Dial list, see page 279 "Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
209
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• For registering the Quick Dial entries, see page 198 "Registering Fax Destinations".
Specifying the destination using Speed Dial
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. Press the [Speed Dial] tab.
5. Select the Speed Dial entry you want by pressing the small square.
A check mark appears in the small square. Press the small square again to cancel the selection.
6. Press [OK].
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report. For printing the Speed
Dial list, see page 279 "Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• For registering the Speed Dial entries, see page 198 "Registering Fax Destinations".
Specifying the destination using the broadcast function
You can send a fax to multiple destinations (up to 100 destinations) simultaneously.
Faxes are sent to destinations in the order they were specified.
210
Sending a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Add a destination by using one of the following methods:
• To add a Quick Dial destination: press [Address Book], press the [Quick Dial List] tab, select a
destination, and then press [OK].
• To add a Speed Dial destination: press [Address Book], press the [Speed Dial List] tab, select
a destination, and then press [OK].
• To add a manually-specified destination: press [Manual Entry], press the box, enter the
destination fax number, and then press [OK] twice.
• While specifying multiple destinations, you can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear all destinations.
• If you specify multiple destinations in Immediate Transmission mode, the mode switches to Memory
Transmission mode temporarily.
• While broadcasting, pressing [Clear] cancels the fax to the current destination only.
Specifying the destination using the redial function
You can specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.
This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to
enter the destination each time.
211
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Redial].
4. Confirm the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
Useful Sending Functions
You can check the status of the other party's machine easily before sending a fax by using the On Hook
Dial function.
Using an external telephone, you can talk and send a fax in one call.
The procedure differs depending on whether [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting] or
[TX/RX Manual Setting] in [Fax Features].
• This function is available in Immediate Transmission mode only.
• For details about [TX/RX Switch Setting], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
Sending a fax using On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to check the destination's status while listening to the tone from the
internal speaker. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax will be received.
• The On Hook Dial function cannot be used when [Fax No. Confirmation] under [Administrator
Tools] is enabled.
212
Sending a Fax
1. Place the original.
If [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting], you cannot send faxes using the exposure
glass.
2. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
3. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press [On Hook].
[On Hook] appears on the screen.
5. Specify the destination using the number keys.
6. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [Start] key.
DYG336
If [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting], Step 7 does not apply.
7. If the original is placed on the exposure glass, press [TX], and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about selecting the transmission mode, see page 203 "Selecting Transmission Mode".
• For details about [Fax No. Confirmation], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
213
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Sending a fax after a conversation
An external telephone allows you to send a fax after finishing your conversation without having to
disconnect and redial. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax has been received.
1. Place the original.
If [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting], you cannot send faxes using the exposure
glass.
2. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
3. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
5. Specify the destination using the external telephone.
6. When the other party answers, tell the receiver that you want to send them a fax
document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
7. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [Start] key.
DYG336
If [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting], Step 8 does not apply.
8. If the original is placed on the exposure glass, press [TX], and then press the [Start] key.
9. Replace the handset.
214
Sending a Fax
Specifying Scan Settings for Faxing
Adjusting image density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
There are three image density levels. The darker the density level, the darker the printout.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [TX Settings].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired density level, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.
For [Density], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Specifying the resolution
This section describes how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.
There are three resolution settings:
Standard
Select this when the original is a printed or typewritten document with normal-sized characters.
Detail
Select this when the original is a document with small print.
Photo
Select this when the original contains images such as photographs or shaded drawings.
215
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [TX Settings].
4. Press [Resolution].
5. Select the desired resolution, and then press [OK].
6. Confirm the resolution you selected is displayed, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution
level. For [Resolution], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
216
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LANFax)
This section describes how to use the fax function of the machine from a computer.
You can send a document directly from a computer through this machine to another fax machine,
without printing the document.
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer
This section describes the basic operation for sending faxes from a computer.
You can select a destination from the LAN-Fax address book or enter a fax number manually. You can
send faxes to up to 100 destinations at one time.
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 10.
• Before sending a fax, the machine stores all the fax data in memory. If the machine's memory
becomes full while storing this data, the fax transmission will be canceled. If this happens, lower the
resolution or reduce the number of pages and try again.
1. Open the file you want to send.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print].
3. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].
4. Specify a destination.
• To specify a destination from the LAN-Fax address book:
Select a destination from [User List:], and then click [Add to List].
Repeat this step to add more destinations.
• To enter a fax number directly:
Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and enter a fax number (up to 40 digits) in [Fax Number:],
and then click [Add to List].
Repeat this step to add more destinations.
5. To attach a cover sheet, click [Edit Cover Sheet] on the [Specify Destination] tab, and then
select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.
Edit the cover sheet as necessary, and then click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
6. Click [Send].
217
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• For details, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• To delete an entered destination, select the destination in the [Destination List:], and then click
[Delete from List].
• You can register the fax number you entered in the [Specify Destination] tab in the LAN-Fax
Address Book. Click [Save to Address Book] to open the dialog box for registering a destination.
• From the [View:] list in the [Address Book] tab, you can select the types of destinations to display.
• [All]: Displays all destinations.
• [Group]: Displays groups only.
• [User]: Displays individual destinations only.
Canceling a fax
You can cancel sending a fax using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on
the status of the job.
Canceling while the machine is receiving a fax from the computer
If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to cancel the fax of another user.
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task bar of your computer.
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click
[Cancel].
3. Click [Yes].
Canceling while sending a fax
Cancel the fax using the control panel.
218
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
4. Press [Fax Jobs] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
Configuring Transmission Settings
This section describes how to configure transmission settings in the LAN-Fax driver's properties.
Properties are set separately for each application.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print].
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click a button such as [Preferences].
LAN-Fax driver properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the [Setup] tab.
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book
This section describes the LAN-Fax address book. Configure the LAN-Fax address book on the
computer. The LAN-Fax address book allows you to specify LAN-Fax destinations quickly and easily.
The LAN-Fax address book can contain up to 1000 entries, including individual destinations and
groups of destinations.
Opening the LAN-Fax address book
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] under [Windows System].
219
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the LAN-Fax driver icon, and then click [Printing preferences].
4. Click the [Address Book] tab.
Registering destinations
1. Open the LAN-Fax address book, and then click [Add User].
2. Enter the destination information, and then click [OK].
You must enter a contact name and fax number.
3. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
Modifying destinations
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, select the destination you want to modify from the
[User List:], and then click [Edit].
2. Modify information as necessary, and then click [OK].
Click [Save as new User] if you want to register a new destination with similar information. This is
useful when you want to register a series of destinations that contain similar information. To close
the dialog box without modifying the original destination, click [Cancel].
3. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
Registering groups
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, and then click [Add Group].
2. Enter the group name in [Group Name].
3. Select the destination you want to include in the group from [User List:], and then click
[Add].
To delete a destination from a group, select the destination you want to delete from [List of Group
Members:], and then click [Delete from List].
4. Click [OK].
5. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
• A group must contain at least one destination.
• A group name must be specified for a group. No two groups can have the same group name.
• A single destination can be included in more than one group.
220
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
Modifying groups
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, select the group you want to modify from the [User
List:], and then click [Edit].
2. To add a destination to the group, select the destination you want to add from [User List:]
and click [Add].
3. To delete a destination from the group, select the destination you want to delete from [List
of Group Members:], and then click [Delete from List].
4. To change the group name, enter the new name in [Group Name].
A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. Click
[OK] and register it under a different name.
5. Click [OK].
6. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
Deleting individual destinations or groups
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, select the destination you want to delete from [User
List:], and then click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
2. Click [Yes].
3. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
• A destination is automatically deleted from a group if that destination is deleted from the LAN-Fax
Address Book. If you are deleting the last destination from a group, a message asking you to
confirm the deletion appears. Click [OK] if you want to delete the group.
• Deleting a group does not delete the destinations it contains from the LAN-Fax Address Book.
Exporting/Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data
• The following procedure is based on Windows 10 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
Exporting LAN-Fax Address Book data
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be exported to a file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Follow this procedure to export LAN-Fax Address Book data.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Export].
221
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
2. Navigate to the location to save the LAN-Fax Address Book data, specify a name for
the file, and then click [Save].
Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from files in CSV format. You can import address
book data from other applications if the data is saved as a CSV file.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Import].
2. Select the file containing the address book data, and then click [Open].
A dialog box for selecting the items to import appears.
3. For each field, select an appropriate item from the list.
Select [*empty*] for fields for which there is no data to import. Note that [*empty*] cannot
be selected for [Name:] and [Fax:].
4. Click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
• CSV files are exported using Unicode encoding.
• LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from CSV files whose character encoding is Unicode
or ASCII.
• Group data cannot be exported or imported.
• Up to 1000 destinations can be registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book. If this limit is exceeded
during importing, the remaining destinations will not be imported.
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print].
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].
3. Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and then click [Edit Cover Sheet].
4. Click [Attach a Cover Sheet].
5. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
222
Receiving a Fax
Receiving a Fax
• When receiving an important fax, we recommend you confirm the contents of the received fax with
the sender.
• The machine may not be able to receive faxes when the amount of free memory space is low.
• You can use an external telephone to use this machine as a telephone.
• Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes.
Selecting Reception Mode
The following explains the reception modes of the fax function and how to select them.
• In FAX/TAD mode, the machine receives the fax automatically after the external telephone
answering device rings the number of times specified in [No. of Rings (TAD)]. Set the external
telephone answering device to ring before receiving a fax. For details about [No. of Rings (TAD)],
see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Types of reception mode
There are four types of reception:
• Fax Only mode
• FAX/TEL Manual mode
• FAX/TEL Auto mode
• FAX/TAD mode
223
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Selecting the reception modes
Is an external telephone
connected to the machine?
No
Yes
Fax Only mode
Do you want to use
an external answering
device?
Yes
FAX/TAD mode
Yes
FAX/TEL Auto mode
No
FAX/TEL Manual mode
No
Do you want to receive
faxes automatically?
Description of reception modes
• Fax Only mode (auto reception)
• When an external telephone is not connected
The machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode.
• When an external telephone is connected
The machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode after the
external telephone rings the number of times specified. It is convenient for people that
use telephones for outgoing calls only.
• FAX/TAD mode (auto reception)
In this mode, the external telephone answering device answers and records messages when
the machine receives telephone calls. If the incoming call is a fax call, the machine receives
the fax automatically. For details, see page 227 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TAD mode".
• FAX/TEL Auto mode (auto reception)
In this mode, the machine receives faxes automatically if a fax calling tone is detected from an
incoming call. For details, see page 226 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Auto mode".
• FAX/TEL Manual mode (manual reception)
224
Receiving a Fax
In this mode, you must answer calls with an external telephone. If a call is a fax call, you must
start the fax reception manually. For details, see page 225 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL
Manual mode".
Configuring the reception mode
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
5. Press [Switch Recep. Mode].
6. Select the desired reception mode.
7. Press the [Home] key.
• In FAX/TAD mode, the machine automatically starts to receive faxes after the external
telephone answering device rings the number of times specified in [No. of Rings (TAD)] under
[Fax Features]. Make sure to set the external telephone answering device to answer calls
before the machine starts to receive faxes. For [No. of Rings (TAD)], see page 247 "Fax
Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• An external telephone is required to use this machine as a telephone. For details about
connecting an external telephone to the machine, see Setup Guide.
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode
• To receive faxes, be sure to first remove any originals loaded in the ADF.
The procedure differs depending on whether [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting] or
[TX/RX Manual Setting] in [Fax Features].
225
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
1. Pick up the handset of the external telephone to answer the call.
A normal telephone call starts.
2. When you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, press the [Home] key, press the [Fax]
icon, and then press the [Start] key.
If [TX/RX Switch Setting] is set to [TX/RX Auto Setting], proceed to Step 5.
3. Press [RX].
4. Press the [Start] key.
5. Replace the handset.
• For details about [TX/RX Switch Setting], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
Receiving a fax in Fax Only mode
When the reception mode is set to Fax Only mode, the machine automatically answers all incoming
calls in fax reception mode.
• You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering a call in the [Number of
Rings] setting under [Fax Features]. For [Number of Rings], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone
call starts. If you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, receive the fax manually. To receive the fax
manually, see page 225 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode".
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Auto mode
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TEL Auto mode, the machine receives faxes automatically if a
fax calling tone is detected from an incoming call.
• You can specify how long the machine rings before it receives faxes in the [RX Mode Switch Time]
setting under [Fax Features]. For [RX Mode Switch Time], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone
call starts. If you hear a fax calling tone, receive the fax manually. To receive the fax manually, see
page 225 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode".
226
Receiving a Fax
Receiving a fax in FAX/TAD mode
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TAD mode, the external telephone answering device answers
and records messages when the machine receives telephone calls. If the incoming call is a fax call, the
machine receives the fax automatically.
1. When there is an incoming call, the external telephone answering device rings the
number of times specified in [No. of Rings (TAD)] under [Fax Features].
For [No. of Rings (TAD)], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
If the external telephone answering device does not answer, the machine starts to receive the fax
automatically.
2. If the external telephone answering device answers, the machine monitors silence on the
line for 30 seconds (silence detection).
• If a fax calling tone or no sound is detected, the machine starts to receive the fax
automatically.
• If a voice is detected, a normal telephone call starts. The external telephone answering device
records messages.
• You can manually receive a fax during silence detection. To receive the fax manually, see
page 225 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode".
• Silence detection does not terminate for 30 seconds even if the external telephone answering
device goes on-hook, unless you press the [Clear/Stop] key and disconnect the call.
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory
To prevent unauthorized users from seeing sensitive faxes, you can set the machine to forward received
faxes to a preset destination, or store them in memory without printing them out.
• The table below shows what happens after forwarding succeeds or fails depending on the
machine’s configuration.
Forwarding
[Print Received
File]
Results
Success
On
The machine prints out the fax and deletes it from
memory.
Success
Off
The machine stores the fax in memory for later manual
printing.
227
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Forwarding
[Print Received
File]
Results
Failure
On
The machine prints out a forwarding failure report,
prints out the fax, and then deletes it from memory.
Failure
Off
The machine prints out a forwarding failure report and
stores the fax in memory for later manual printing.
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory and the Fax Received indicator will flash. The remaining
pages will start printing as soon as the problem is resolved.
• The number of forwarding attempts and the attempt interval time can be specified using Web
Image Monitor. For details about the forwarding destination, forwarding trials and interval settings,
see page 335 "Configuring the System Settings".
Forwarding settings
To specify the forwarding conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
5. Press [ ].
6. Press [Reception File Sett.].
7. Select [Forward and Print].
To send e-mail notifications after faxes are forwarded, proceed to Step 8.
8. Press [Notify Forwarding].
228
Receiving a Fax
9. Press [Active].
• [Active]: Send an e-mail notification after forwarding. E-mail notification destination depends
on how the forwarding destination is configured.
• [Inactive]: An e-mail notification is not sent.
10. Press the [Home] key.
Specifying the forwarding destination using Web Image Monitor
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click the [Fax] tab.
4. Specify the forwarding destination in [Forwarding Destination].
• [E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address.
• [Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding destination.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [OK].
7. Close the web browser.
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see page 335 "Configuring the System Settings".
Configuring the storing conditions
To specify the storing conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
229
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
5. Press [ ].
6. Press [Print Received File].
7. Select [On] or [Off].
• [On]: Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.
• [Off]: Store the received faxes in memory for later manual printing.
8. Press the [Home] key.
• When the fax is successfully printed out, it will be deleted from memory.
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory. The remaining pages will start printing as soon as the
problem is resolved.
Printing out faxes stored in memory
This section explains how to print out received faxes stored in the machine's memory.
If the Data-In indicator is lit, there is a fax in machine's memory. Follow the procedure below to print the
fax.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Rx File].
4. Select the file, and then press [Print].
5. Press [Yes].
The machine prints out the stored fax and deletes it from memory.
6. Press the [Home] key.
230
Receiving a Fax
• If tray 2 is installed, you can select which tray to feed paper from in [Select Paper Tray] under fax
feature settings. If you set the machine to switch between Tray 1 and 2 automatically in this setting,
you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under [Paper Settings].
For details about [Select Paper Tray], see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)" and [Paper Tray Priority], see page 266 "Paper Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• If the Fax Received indicator is lit, there is a received fax in the machine's memory that could not be
printed out due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper jam. The printing will
start as soon as the problem is resolved.
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders
You can set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the registered Special Senders. This helps
you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.
To use this function, you must first register Special Senders using Web Image Monitor, and then select
whether to accept or reject faxes from them.
Registering Special Senders
This section explains how to register special senders.
Up to 30 special senders can be registered.
1. Start the web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Special Sender].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Special Sender].
231
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
4. Select a number for [Special Sender No.] from the list (1 to 30).
5. Enter the special sender's fax number (up to 20 characters) in [Special Sender Number].
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click Apply.
8. Close the web browser.
• You can use the numbers 0 to 9, spaces, alphanumeric characters, and symbols.
Limiting the incoming faxes
This section explains how to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the programmed
special senders.
1. Start the web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Press [Special Sender].
3. Select senders from whom to receive faxes in [Reception Conditions].
• [All Senders]
Select this to receive faxes from all senders.
• [Not Special Sender]
Select this to reject faxes from the special senders and receive faxes from all other senders.
232
Receiving a Fax
• [Special Sender Only]
Select this to receive faxes from the special senders and reject faxes from all other senders.
4. Enter the administrator password if required.
5. Click [Apply].
6. Close the web browser.
233
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Lists/Reports Related to Fax
The lists and reports related to the fax function are as follow:
• Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
• Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
• TX/RX Standby Files
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.
• Quick Dial Dest.
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.
• Fax Speed Dial Dest.
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
• By Speed Dial No.
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.
• By Name
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.
• Special Sender List
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.
• Power Failure Report
Prints a report when the machine's power has been interrupted while sending or receiving a fax, or
images stored in the machine's memory have been lost due to the machine being turned off for a
prolonged period of time.
• For more information on Fax Journal and Print TX Status, see page 247 "Fax Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Repots will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports. For details about loading paper, see page 56 "Loading Paper".
234
7. Configuring the Machine Using the
Control Panel
This chapter describes how to configure the machine using the control panel.
Basic Operation
Use the following procedure to access the machine settings.
To check which category the function you want to configure belongs to, see page 237 "Menu Chart".
When Using the Touch Panel Model
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Select the settings you want to use.
For a list of available items, see page 237 "Menu Chart".
If you select [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Administrator Tools] menu, you might be
requested to enter a password. Enter the four-digit password, and then press [OK]. For details
about the password, see [Admin. Tools Lock] on page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
4. To confirm setting items and values displayed, press [OK].
5. To go back to the previous item, press [Exit].
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
There are two main ways to access the machine settings:
• Press the [User Tools] key to access the system or network settings.
• Press the [ ] or [ ] key while in standby mode of each function to access the Copy or Scan
settings.
To check which category the function you want to configure belongs to, see page 237 "Menu
Chart".
235
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
1. If you want to configure the machine's system settings, press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
Otherwise, press the [ ] or [ ] key while "Ready" is displayed on the initial screen of the Copy
and Scan settings.
DYG333
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the settings you want to use.
For a list of available items, see page 237 "Menu Chart".
If you select [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Admin. Tools] menu, you might be
requested to enter a password. Enter the four-digit password, and then press the [OK] key.
For details about the password, see [Admin. Tools Lock] on page 310 "Administrator Tools
Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
3. To confirm setting items and values displayed, press the [OK] key.
4. To go back to the previous item, press the [Back] key.
• To return to the initial screen, press the [Back] key the same amount of times as the number of
selected items, or press the [User Tools] key once.
• Some setting items will be reflected after the machine restarts.
236
Menu Chart
Menu Chart
This section lists the parameters included in each menu.
For details about configuring the machine using Web Image Monitor, see page 327 "Configuring the
Machine Using Utilities".
• Some items can also be configured using Web Image Monitor.
When Using the Touch Panel Model
• Copier Features
For details, see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Scanner Features
For details, see page 244 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Fax Features
For details, see page 247 "Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Address Book
For details, see page 255 "Address Book Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• System Settings
For details, see page 256 "System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Paper Settings
For details, see page 266 "Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Network Settings
For details, see page 282 "Network Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Print List/Report
For details, see page 279 "Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Administrator Tools
For details, see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
• Printer Features
For details, see page 262 "Printer Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• @Remote
For details, see page 286 "@Remote (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
• Copier Features ([ ] [ ] key setting)
237
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
For details, see page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Scan Settings ([ ] [ ] key setting)
For details, see page 292 "Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• System Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 294 "System Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Tray Paper Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 304 "Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Network Wizard ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see Setup Guide.
• Network Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 319 "Network Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• Print List/Report ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 316 "Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Admin. Tools ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 310 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Printer Features ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 299 "Printer Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• @Remote ([User Tools] key setting)
For details, see page 324 "@Remote (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
238
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Copier Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Item
Select Paper
Description
Value
Specifies the paper size used for printing copies.
• Tray 1
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from
that tray only.
• Tray 2
When a paper size is selected, the machine
prints from the trays that contain the paper of the
specified size, except the bypass tray. If Tray 1
and tray 2 both contain the paper of the
specified size, the machine starts to print from the
tray specified as the priority tray in [Paper Tray
Priority] under [Paper Settings]. If that tray runs
out of paper, the machine automatically switches
to the other tray to continue printing.
• A4
• Bypass Tray
• 8 1/2 × 11
• 16K
Default: [Tray 1]
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] and
[Bypass Tray] appear.
Sort
Configures the machine to sort the output pages
into sets when making multiple copies of a multipage document (P1, P2, P1, P2...).
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
239
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Original Type
Description
Specifies the content of originals, to optimize
copy quality.
Value
• Text/Photo
Select this when the
original contains both
text and photographs
or pictures.
• Text
Select this when the
original contains only
text and no
photographs or
pictures.
• Photo
Select this when the
original contains
photographs or
pictures. Use this mode
for the following types
of original:
• Photographs
• Pages that are
entirely or mainly
photographs or
pictures, such as
magazine pages.
Default: [Text/Photo]
Density
Specifies the image density for photocopying.
Increase the level (black
squares) to increase the
density.
Default: The default setting
is the middle of 5
adjustment levels.
240
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Reduce/Enlarge
Description
Specifies the percentage by which copies are
enlarged or reduced.
Value
• 50% (A4->A6)
• 71% (A4->A5 B5>B6)
• 82% (8 × 13->A4)
• 93%
• 100%
• 122% (A5->B5J)
• 141% (A5->A4 B6>B5)
• 200% (A6->A4)
• 400%
• Manual Entry
• 50% (A4->A6)
• 65% (LT->HLT)
• 78% (LG->LT)
• 93%
• 100%
• 129% (HLT->LT)
• 155% (HLT->LG)
• 200% (A6->A4)
• 400%
• Manual Entry
Default: [100%]
241
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Duplex/Combine
Description
Value
Specifies combined copying. Select a copy
mode according to your original and how you
want the copy outputs to appear. For more
details, see page 121 "Copying Single-Sided
Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing"
and page 126 "Copying 2-Sided Originals with
2-Sided and Combined Printing".
• Off
Note that enabling combined copying
automatically disables ID card copying.
• 1S 4Org->Cmb 2on1
2S
• 1S 2Org->Cmb 2on1
1S
• 1S 4Org->Cmb 4on1
1S
• 1S Orig->2S Copy
• 1S 8Org->Cmb 4on1
2S
• 2S 1Org->Cmb 2on1
1S
• 2S 2Org->Cmb 4on1
1S
• 2S Orig->2S Copy
• 2S 2Org->Cmb 2on1
2S
• 2S 4Org->Cmb 4on1
2S
• Manual 2Sd Scan
Mode
Default: [1S Orig->2S
Copy]
242
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
ID Card Setting
Description
Specifies the ID Card Copy setting.
Value
• Center Line
Specify whether to
draw a center line
when making ID card
copy.
• Print
• Do not Print
Default: [Do not Print]
• Card Size
You can change the ID
card copy scanning
size.
• Horizontal: 50 to
148mm (1.90 to
5.83 inches)
• Vertical: 50 to
216mm (1.90 to
8.50 inches)
Default(horizontal ×
vertical): 57×88mm
(2.24×3.46inches)
243
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Scanner Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Item
Scan Size
Description
Value
Specifies the scanning size according to
the size of the original.
8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8
1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, A4, B5 JIS, A5
SEF, 16K, Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Scanning
Mode
Specifies the scanning mode for blackand-white scanning using the control
panel.
• Halftone
The machine creates 1-bit blackand-white images. Images contain
only black and white colors.
• Color
The machine creates 8-bit color
images. Images are full color.
• Gray Scale
The machine creates 8-bit blackand-white images. Images contain
black and white, and intermediate
gray colors.
Default: [Halftone]
Maximum Email Specifies the maximum size of a file that
Size
can be sent by e-mail.
• 1 MB
• 2 MB
• 3 MB
• 4 MB
• 5 MB
• No Limit
Default: [1 MB]
244
Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Density
Description
Specifies the image density for scanning
originals.
Value
Increase the level (black squares) to
increase the density.
Default: The default setting is the middle
of 5 adjustment levels.
Resolution
Specifies the resolution for scanning the
original.
• 100 × 100dpi
• 150 × 150dpi
• 200 × 200dpi
• 300 × 300dpi
• 400 × 400dpi
• 600 × 600dpi
Default: [300 × 300dpi]
Compression
(Color)
Limitless Scan
Specifies the color compression ratio for
JPEG files. The lower the compression
ratio, the higher the quality but greater
the file size.
Sets the machine to request next originals
when scanning with the exposure glass.
• Low
• Medium
• High
Default: [Medium]
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Single/ Multi
Page
Specifies whether to create a multi-page
file containing all pages or separate
single-page files when scanning multiple
pages.
• Multi-page
• Single Page
Default: [Multi-page]
Note that a scanned file can contain
multiple pages only when the file format
is PDF or TIFF. If the file format is JPEG, a
single-page file is created for each
scanned page.
245
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Scan Original
Description
Specifies the orientation to scan and
whether to have scanned in double side.
Value
• Simplex Portrait
• Dup.Portrait:T to T
• Dup.Portrait:T to B
• Dup.Landscape:T to T
• Dup.Landscape:T To B
Default: [Simplex Portrait]
246
Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Reception Settings
Specifies the settings for receiving a fax.
Item
Switch Recep.
Mode
Description
Specifies the reception mode.
Value
• Fax Only
The machine automatically answers
all incoming calls in fax reception
mode.
• FAX/TEL(Manually)
The machine rings when it receives
incoming calls. The machine receives
faxes only when you manually
receive faxes.
• FAX/TAD
The machine receives faxes
automatically when a fax call is
received. Otherwise, the connected
telephone answering device answers
the call.
• FAX/TEL(Auto)
The machine receives faxes
automatically if a fax calling tone is
detected from an incoming call.
If you answer the call with the
external telephone while the machine
is ringing, a normal telephone call
starts. If you hear a fax calling tone,
receive the fax manually.
Default: [Fax Only]
247
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Description
Auto Reduction Sets the machine to reduce the size of
a received fax if it is too large to print
on a single sheet of paper.
Note that the machine only reduces
the size down to 74%. If further
reduction is required to fit the fax on a
single sheet, it will be printed on
separate sheets without being
reduced.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
Default may be [Off] depending on
the [Country] setting under
[Administrator Tools].
No. of Rings
(TAD)
Specifies the number of times the
external telephone answering device
rings before the machine starts to
receive faxes in FAX/TAD mode.
1 to 20 times, in increments of 1
Number of
Rings
Specifies the number of times the
3 to 5 times
machine rings before it starts to receive Default: 3 times
faxes in Fax Only mode.
RX Mode
Switch Time
Specifies how long the machine rings
before it starts to receive faxes in FAX/
TEL(Auto) mode.
Receive
Conditions
Specifies whether to receive or reject
faxes from the programmed Special
Senders.
Default: 5 times
5 to 99 seconds
Default: 15 seconds
• All Senders
Receive faxes from all senders.
• Special Sender
Receive faxes from the Special
Senders and reject faxes from
all other senders.
• Not Special Sender
Reject faxes from the Special
Senders and receive faxes from
all other senders.
Default: [All Senders]
Duplex Print
Specify whether or not received fax
documents are to be printed on both
sides of the paper.
• Off
• Duplex Portrait: T to T
• Duplex Portrait: T to B
Default: [Off]
248
Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Reception File
Sett.
Description
Sets the machine to store received
faxes into memory for printing or
forward them to a preset destination.
Use Web Image Monitor to specify the
forwarding destination (for details, see
page 335 "Configuring the System
Settings").
Print Received
File
Sets the machine to automatically print
the faxes received into memory or
store them for later manual printing.
Value
• Print
• Forward and Print
Default: [Print]
• On
Automatically print out the
received faxes and delete from
memory.
The machine prints out the
received faxes and deletes them
from memory within the
specified time.
• Off
Store the received faxes in
memory for manual printing
specified time.
Default: [On]
Notify
Forwarding
RX Image Auto
Reduction
Sets the machine to send e-mail
notifications after faxes are forwarded.
The e-mail notification destination
depends on how the forwarding
destination is configured using Web
Image Monitor (for details, see
page 335 "Configuring the System
Settings").
Reduces the main scan line to fit to the
printable area, and then prints the
image in it after reducing the size of
the image.
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Select [On] to enable this function.
Select [Off] to disable this function.
249
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Select Paper Tray
Item
Select Paper
Tray
Description
Specifies the tray for printing received
faxes.
Note that only A4, Letter, or Legal size
paper can be used for printing faxes.
Make sure to select a tray that contains
paper of the valid size.
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1]
appears.
Value
• Auto
The machine uses Tray 1 and
Tray 2 if they contain paper of
the same size. In this case, the
machine starts to print from the
tray specified as the priority
tray in [Paper Tray Priority]
under [Paper Settings]. If that
tray runs out of paper, the
machine automatically
switches to the other tray to
continue printing.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
Default: [Auto]
Delete TX Stand.File
Deletes unsent fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory. The machine can store up to 5 unsent
fax jobs. This function is only performed when selected.
Item
250
Description
Delete
Selected File
To delete a fax job, select the desired
job, press [Delete], and then press
[Yes]. Pressing [Exit] without pressing
[Delete] exits to the previous level of
the menu tree without deleting the fax
job.
Delete All Files
To delete the fax jobs, press [Delete
All], and then press [Yes]. Pressing
[Exit] without pressing [Delete All] exits
to the previous level of the menu tree
without deleting the fax jobs.
Value
Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Communication Sett.
Item
ECM
Transmission
ECM
Reception
Dial Tone
Detect
Description
Sets the machine to automatically
resend parts of the data that are lost
during transmission.
Sets the machine to automatically
receive parts of the data that are lost
during reception.
Sets the machine to detect a dial tone
before the machine begins to dial the
destination automatically.
(Default may be [Not Detect]
depending on the [Country] setting
under [Administrator Tools].)
Transmission
Speed
Specifies the transmission speed for the
fax modem.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
• Detect
• Not Detect
Default: [Detect]
• 33.6 Kbps
• 14.4 Kbps
• 9.6 Kbps
• 7.2 Kbps
• 4.8 Kbps
• 2.4 Kbps
Default: [33.6 Kbps]
Reception
Speed
Specifies the reception speed for the
fax modem.
• 33.6 Kbps
• 14.4 Kbps
• 9.6 Kbps
• 7.2 Kbps
• 4.8 Kbps
• 2.4 Kbps
Default: [33.6 Kbps]
251
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Report Print Setting
Item
Description
Print TX Status
Sets the machine to print a transmission
report automatically after a fax
transmission.
• Error Only
When the machine is in Immediate
Transmission mode, the image of the
original will not be reproduced on the
report, even if [Error Only(Image)] or
[Every TX (Image)] is selected.
• Error Only(Image)
Note that if a memory error occurs for
LAN-Fax transmission, a transmission
report will always be printed
regardless of this setting.
The transmission report will be printed
on A4 or Letter size paper.
Value
Prints a report when a
transmission error occurs.
Prints a report with an image of
the original when transmission
error occurs.
• Every TX
Prints a report for every fax
transmission.
• Every TX (Image)
Prints a report with an image of
the original for every fax
transmission.
• Do not Print
Default: [Every TX (Image)]
Print Fax
Journal
Sets the machine to print a fax journal
automatically for every 50 fax jobs
(both sent and received).
The fax journal will be printed using
the tray set for [Facsimile] under
[Paper Tray Priority] in [Paper
Settings], on A4 or Letter size paper.
252
• Auto Print
• Do not Auto Print
Default: [Auto Print]
Fax Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Transmission Setting
Item
Immediate TX
Description
Sets the machine to send a fax
immediately when the original is
scanned.
Value
• Off
Select this when using Memory
Transmission.
• On
Select this when using
Immediate Transmission.
• Next Fax Only
Select this when using
Immediate Transmission for the
next transmission only.
Default: [Off]
Resolution
Specifies the resolution to use for
scanning originals.
• Standard
Select this when the original is a
printed or typewritten document
with normal-sized characters.
• Detail
Select this when the original is a
document with small print.
• Photo
Select this when the original
contains images such as
photographs or shaded
drawings.
Default: [Standard]
Density
Pause Time
Specifies the image density to use for
scanning originals.
Specifies the length of pause time
when a pause is inserted between the
digits of a fax number.
Press [ ] to increase the density.
Default: The default setting is the
middle of 3 adjustment levels.
1 to 15 seconds
Default: 3 seconds
253
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Description
Value
Auto Redial
Sets the machine to redial the fax
• Off
destination automatically when the line
• On
is busy or a transmission error occurs, if
Default: [On]
the machine is in Memory Transmission
mode. The number of redial attempts is
preset to two or three times, depending
on the [Country] setting under
[Administrator Tools], in five-minute
intervals.
Print Fax
Header
Sets the machine to add a header to
• Off
every fax you send. The header
• On
includes the current date and time, user
Default: [On]
fax name and fax number of the
machine, job ID, and page
information.
Fax Original
Specifies the orientation to fax and
whether to have faxes printed in both
sides.
• Simplex Portrait
• Dup.Portrait:T to T
• Dup.Portrait:T to B
• Dup.Landscape:T to T
• Dup.Landscape:T To B
Default: [Simplex Portrait]
TX/RX Switch Setting
Item
TX/RX Switch
Setting
254
Description
Specifies whether to switch the
transmission and reception modes of
the machine automatically or
manually.
Value
• TX/RX Auto Setting
• TX/RX Manual Setting
Default: [TX/RX Manual Setting]
Address Book Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Address Book Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Item
Quick Dial List
Description
Specifies the fax number and name for
Quick Dial entries. You can register up to
8 Quick Dial entries.
Value
• No.
Specifies the Quick Dial number.
• Number:
Specifies the fax number for Quick
Dial entries. The fax number can
contain up to 40 characters,
including 0 to 9, pause, " ",
" ", and space.
• Name:
Specifies the name for Quick Dial
entries. The name can contain up
to 20 characters.
Speed Dial List
Specifies the fax number and name for
Speed Dial entries. You can register up
to 100 Speed Dial entries.
• No.
Specifies the Speed Dial number.
• Number:
Specifies the fax number for
Speed Dial entries. The fax
number can contain up to 40
characters, including 0 to 9,
pause, " ", " ", and space.
• Name:
Specifies the name for Speed Dial
entries. The name can contain up
to 20 characters.
255
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Adjust Sound Volume
Specifies the volume of the sounds produced by the machine.
Item
Panel Key
Sound
Description
Specifies the volume of the beep that
sounds when a key is pressed.
Value
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Low]
Ring Volume
Specifies the volume of the ringing
tone.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
On Hook
Mode
Specifies the volume of the sound from
the speaker during on hook mode.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
Job End Tone
Specifies the volume of the beep that
sounds when a job is complete.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
256
System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Job Error Tone
Description
Specifies the volume of the beep that
sounds when a fax transmission error
occurs.
Value
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
Alarm Volume
Specifies the volume of the alarm that
sounds when an operation error
occurs.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
I/O Timeout
Item
USB
Network
Description
Specifies how many seconds the
machine waits for print data, if the
data is interrupted while it is being sent
from the computer via USB. If the
machine does not receive any more
data within the time specified here, the
machine only prints the data it has
received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports,
increase the timeout period.
Specifies how many seconds the
machine waits for print data, if the
data is interrupted while it is being sent
from the computer via network. If the
machine does not receive any more
data within the time specified here, the
machine only prints the data it has
received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports,
increase the timeout period.
Value
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
Default: [60 sec.]
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
Default: [15 sec.]
257
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Locked Print
Fixed USB Port
Description
Value
Specifies how many seconds the
machine holds a new Locked Print file,
when the machine cannot store any
more Locked Print files. Within this
time, you can print or delete the new
Locked Print file. You can also print or
delete an existing Locked Print file so
that the new Locked Print file can be
stored in the machine.
• 0 to 300 seconds, in increments
of 1 second
Specifies whether the same printer/
LAN-Fax driver can be used for
multiple machines or not under USB
connection.
Default: [60 seconds]
• Off
You must install the printer/
LAN-Fax driver separately for
individual machines, because
the machine other than the
original will be recognized as a
new device upon USB
connection.
• On
The same printer/LAN-Fax
driver you have installed in your
computer can be used with any
machine other than the one
originally used for installation, if
the machine is of the same
model.
Default: [Off]
258
System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Description
Export to NFC
Specifies whether or not to
synchronize the data you have
configured using the control panel and
Web Image Monitor with the data
stored in NFC.
You can read and write the data in
NFC by using the application
corresponding to the machine.
Value
• Off
Does not synchronize the data
you have configured using the
control panel and Web Image
Monitor with the data stored in
NFC.
• On
Synchronizes the data you have
configured using the control
panel and Web Image Monitor
with the data stored in NFC.
Default: [On]
Auto Continue
Item
Description
Auto Continue
Sets the machine to ignore an error
with paper size or type and continue
printing. The printing stops temporarily
when an error is detected, and restarts
automatically after about ten seconds
using the settings made on the control
panel.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
However, if the size of paper specified
on the control panel and that of the
paper loaded in the paper tray or the
paper size specified for the print job
do not match when printing restarts, it
may cause a paper jam.
Toner Saving
Item
Toner Saving
Description
Sets the machine to print using a
reduced amount of toner (for prints
made by the copier function only).
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
259
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Printer Registration
Adjust the registration of each tray if necessary. You can adjust the registration value between -15
and +15 (that is, -1.5 and +1.5 mm, in 0.1 mm increments).
Default: 0 for all parameters
Item
Description
Horiz.: Tray 1
Select this to adjust the tray 1 registration horizontally.
Horiz.: Tray 2
Select this to adjust the tray 2 registration horizontally.
Vert.: Tray 1
Select this to adjust the tray 1 registration vertically.
Vert.: Tray 2
Select this to adjust the tray 2 registration vertically.
Horiz.: Bypass
Tray
Select this to adjust the bypass tray registration horizontally.
Vert.: Bypass
Tray
Select this to adjust the bypass tray registration vertically.
Horiz.: Duplex
Unit
Select this to adjust the registration of the back of duplex printing horizontally.
Vert.: Duplex
Unit
Select this to adjust the registration of the back of duplex printing vertically.
Low Humidity Mode
Item
Low Humidity
Mode
Description
If the machine is used in a room where
humidity level is low, black lines of a
few millimeters thick may appear on
printouts with 75-millimeter spaces in
between. Selecting [On] for this setting
may prevent these lines from
appearing (wait for about one day
until this setting becomes effective).
Note that when this setting is enabled,
the machine automatically performs
self-maintenance in every 10 minutes.
260
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Image Density
Item
Description
Image Density
Adjusts the density of images on prints.
Value
-3 to +3
Default: 0
261
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Printer Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
List/Test Print
Prints lists showing configurations on the machine.
The lists will be printed using the tray set for [Printer] under [Paper Tray Priority] in [Paper Settings]
on A4 or Letter size paper.
Item
Description
Test Page
Prints a test page for checking the single-sided printing condition. The test page
contains network settings.
PCL Font List
Prints installed PCL font list.
PS Font List
Prints installed PostScript font list.
Duplex Test
Page
Prints a test page for checking the duplex printing condition.
System
Item
Copies
Description
Sets the machine to print the specified
number of sets.
Value
1 to 999
Default: 1
This setting is disabled if the number of
pages to print is specified by the
printer driver.
Sub Paper
Size
262
Sets the machine to print onto paper of
another size if the specified paper is
not loaded in any tray. Alternative
sizes are preset to A4 and Letter.
• Auto
• Off
Default: [Auto]
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Default Page
Size
Description
Specifies the paper size to be used
when the paper size is not specified in
the print job.
Value
A4, A5 LEF, A5, A6, 8 1/2 × 11,
8 1/2 × 13, 16K, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2,
C6 Env, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 8 1/2 × 14,
5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, C5
Env, DL Env, 8 1/2 × 13 2/5, 8
1/2 × 13 3/5, 8.11 × 13.3
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Duplex
Sets the machine to print on both sides
of paper according to the specified
binding method.
• None
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
Default: [None]
Blank Page
Print
Sets the machine to print blank pages.
• On
When cover sheet printing is enabled
from the printer driver, cover sheets
are inserted even if you select [Off].
• Off
Default: [On]
Note that this setting has lower priority
than the printer driver's blank page
setting.
Print Error
Report
Sets the machine to print an error page
when the machine detects a printer or
memory error.
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
PCL Menu
Specifies conditions when using PCL for printing.
Item
Orientation
Description
Specifies the page orientation.
Value
• Portrait
• Landscape
Default: [Portrait]
263
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Form Lines
Description
Value
Specifies the number of lines per page. 5 to 128
Default: 64
Default: 60
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Specifies the ID of the default font you
want to use.
0 to 89
Specifies the point size for the default
font.
4.00 to 999.75
This setting is effective only for a
variable-space font.
You can change the value in 0.25
increments.
Specifies the number of characters per
inch for the default font.
0.44 to 99.99
Default: 0
Default: 12.00 points
Default: 10.00 pitch
This setting is effective only for fixedspace fonts.
Symbol Set
Specifies the character set for the
default font. The following sets are
available:
Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO L1, ISO L2,
ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850,
PC-852, PC-858, PC8-TK, Win L1,
Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text,
VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8,
PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal,
ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO
17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win
3.0, MC Text, ISO L6, ISO L9,
PC-775, PC-1004, Win Baltic
Default: [PC-8]
Courier Font
Specifies a courier-type font.
• Regular
• Dark
Default: [Regular]
Extend A4
Width
264
Sets the machine to extend the width of
the printable area of A4 size paper,
reducing side margin width.
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Description
Append CR to
LF
Sets the machine to append a CR code
to each LF code to print text data
clearly.
PCL Resolution
Value
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
Specifies the print resolution in dots per
• 600 × 600 dpi
inch.
Default: [600 × 600 dpi]
PS Menu
Specifies conditions when using PostScript for printing.
Item
PS Resolution
Description
Specifies the print resolution in dots
per inch.
Value
• 600 × 600 dpi
• 1200 × 1200 dpi
Default: [600 × 600 dpi]
265
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Item
Description
Paper
Size: Tray
1
Value
A4, B5 JIS, A5 SEF, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2
× 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2,
8 1/2 × 13, 16K, A5 LEF, 8 1/2 × 13 2/5,
8 1/2 × 13 3/5, 8.11 × 13.3, Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Paper
Size: Tray
2
Specifies the paper size for
Tray 2.
• A4
This setting appears only when
the optional paper feed unit is
installed.
• B5 JIS
• 8 1/2 × 11
• A5 SEF
• 81/2 × 14
• 8 1/2 × 13 2/5
• 51/2 × 81/2
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
266
Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Description
Paper
Size:
Bypass
Value
A4, B5 JIS, A5 SEF, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2
× 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2,
8 1/2 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2,
C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env,
A5 LEF, 8 1/2 × 13 2/5, 8 1/2 × 13 3/5, 8.11 ×
13.3, Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Paper
Type: Tray
1
Specifies the paper type for
tray 1.
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Label Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Thick Paper 2
Default: [Plain Paper]
267
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Paper
Type: Tray
2
Description
Value
Specifies the paper type for
Tray 2.
• Thin Paper
This setting appears only when
the optional paper feed unit is
installed.
• Thick Paper 1
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Paper
Type:
Bypass
Specifies the paper type for
bypass tray.
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Label Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Envelope
• Thick Paper 2
Default: [Plain Paper]
268
Paper Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Bypass
Tray
Priority
Description
Specifies how print jobs using
the bypass tray are handled.
Value
• Machine Setting(s)
The machine prints all print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
An error will occur if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not
match.
• Any Size/Type
The machine prints all print jobs according to the
printer driver’s settings.
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not
match. However, if the paper is too small for the
print job, the printed image will be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs
according to the printer driver’s settings and
prints standard size print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds
even if the paper size/type settings of the
machine and printer driver do not match.
However, if the paper is too small for the print
job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if
the paper size/type settings of the machine and
printer driver do not match.
Default: [Machine Setting(s)]
269
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Description
Paper Tray
Priority
Specifies the tray that the
machine checks first for paper
that can be used for the job
when a tray is set to be selected
automatically.
If multiple trays contain valid
paper, the first tray the machine
finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of
paper, the machine
automatically switches to the
next tray to continue printing.
If Tray 2 is not installed, [Tray
2] does not appear.
Value
• Printer
Select a tray to check first when automatic tray
selection is specified for the print job.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
Default: [Tray 1]
• Copier
Selects a tray to check first when [A4], or [8
1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] under
copy settings and both tray 1 and tray 2 contain
paper of that size, the machine starts to print
from the specified tray.
Select a tray to check first when [A4], [8 1/2 ×
11], or [16K] is selected for [Select Paper]
under [Copier Features].
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
Default: [Tray 1]
• Facsimile
[Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] under
fax feature settings, and both Tray 1 and Tray 2
contain paper of the same size, the machine
starts to print from the specified tray.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
Default: [Tray 1]
Size
Mismatch
Detection
270
Sets the machine to report an
error if the paper size does not
match the print job's settings.
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Item
Description
Set Date/Time
Sets the date and time of the
machine’s internal clock.
(Default may differ
depending on the [Country]
setting under [Administrator
Tools].)
Value
• Set Date
Specifies the date of the machine’s internal
clock.
Only dates that correspond with the year and
month can be set. Incompatible dates will be
refused.
Default date format: [Day/Month/Year]
• Date format: Month/Day/Year, Day/
Month/Year, or Year/Month/Day
Year: 2000 to 2099
Month: 1 to 12
Day: 1 to 31
• Set Time
Sets the time of the machine’s internal clock.
Default date format: [24-hour Format]
• Time format: 12-hour Format, 24-hour
Format
AM/PM stamp: AM, PM (for 12-hour
Format)
Hour: 0 to 23 (for 24-hour Format), or 1
to 12 (for 12-hour Format)
Minute: 0 to 59
271
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Program Fax
Info.
Description
Specifies the fax name and
fax number of the machine.
Value
• Number:
Specifies the fax number of the machine using
up to 20 characters, including 0 to 9, space,
and "+".
• Name:
Specifies the fax name of the machine using
up to 20 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
Dial/Push
Phone
Specifies the line type of the
telephone line.
• Push Phone
To configure this setting,
contact your telephone
company and select the
setting based on your
telephone line. Selecting a
wrong setting may cause
failures in fax transmissions.
• Dial Phone (20PPS)
• Dial Phone (10PPS)
Default: [Push Phone]
[Dial Phone (20PPS)] may
not appear depending on
the country setting of the
machine.
PSTN / PBX
PBX Access
Number
Sets the machine to connect
to the public switched
telephone network (PSTN) or
a private branch exchange
(PBX).
Specifies the dial number to
access the outside line when
the machine is connected to
a PBX.
Make sure that this setting
matches the setting of your
PBX. Otherwise, you may not
be able to send faxes to
outside destinations.
272
• PSTN
• PBX
Default: [PSTN]
0 to 999
Default: 9
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Description
Function Priority
Specifies the mode that is
activated when the power is
turned on, or if the time
specified for [System Reset
Timer] elapses without
activity while the initial
screen of the current mode is
displayed.
System Reset
Timer
Sets the machine to return to
the mode specified in
[Function Priority].
This setting is also applied to
the timeout for copying the
next document while ID card
copy and manual 2-sided
copy is performed.
Value
• Home
• Copier
• Facsimile
• Scanner
Default: [Home]
• 30 sec.
• 1 min.
• 2 min.
• 3 min.
• 5 min.
• 10 min.
• Off
Default: [1 min.]
Energy Saver
Mode
Sets the machine to enter
Energy Saver mode, Energy
Saver mode 1 or Energy
Saver mode 2, to reduce
power consumption. The
machine recovers from
Energy Saver mode when it
receives a print job, prints a
received fax, or one of the
keys on the control panel is
pressed.
• EnergySaverMode 1
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if
the machine has been idle for about 30
seconds. It takes less time to recover from
Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power
consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1
than in Energy Saver mode 2.
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
273
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Energy Saver
Mode
Description
Sets the machine to enter
Energy Saver mode, Energy
Saver mode 1 or Energy
Saver mode 2, to reduce
power consumption. The
machine recovers from
Energy Saver mode when it
receives a print job, prints a
received fax, or one of the
keys on the control panel is
pressed.
Value
• EnergySaverMode 2
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2
after the period of time specified for this setting
is passed. The machine consumes less power
in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver
mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from
Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver
mode 1.
• Europe
• On (1 to 20 minutes)
• 30 sec.
Default: [30 sec.]
• Countries other than European countries
• On (1 to 240 minutes)
• 30 sec.
• Off
Default: [30 sec.]
274
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Language
Description
Value
Specifies the language used
on the screen and in reports.
• English
The default value for this
setting is the language you
have specified during the
Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
• Swedish
• Norwegian
• Danish
• Finnish
• Portuguese
• Czech
• Hungarian
• Polish
• Japanese
• Simplified Chinese
• Russian
• Brazilian Portuguese
• Turkish
• Traditional Chinese
• Arabic
275
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Country
Description
Selects the country in which
the machine is used. The
country code you specify
determines the time and date
display format and the
default values of the fax
transmission-related settings.
Algeria, Argentina, Australia, Austria,
Make sure to select the
country code correctly.
Selecting a wrong country
code may cause failures in
fax transmissions.
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Guam,
Guatemala,
The default value for this
setting is the country code
you have specified during
the Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
Country
Selects the country in which
the machine is used. The
country code you specify
determines the time and date
display format and the
default values of the fax
transmission-related settings.
Make sure to select the
country code correctly.
Selecting a wrong country
code may cause failures in
fax transmissions.
The default value for this
setting is the country code
you have specified during
the Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
276
Value
Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria,
Canada, Chile, China, Colombia, Costa Rica,
Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, Egypt, El
Salvador, Estonia,
Honduras, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India,
Ireland, Israel, Italy,
Japan, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kuwait,
Latvia, Lebanon, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg,
Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Montenegro, Morocco,
Netherlands, New Zealand, Nicaragua, Nigeria,
Norway,
Oman, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines,
Poland, Portugal, Puerto Rico,
Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Serbia,
Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Africa,
Spain, Sri Lanka, Sweden, Switzerland,
Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia,
Turkey,
UAE, UK, Uruguay, USA, Venezuela, Vietnam,
Virgin Islands, Yemen
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Reset Settings
Description
Be sure not to clear the
settings by mistake.
Value
• Reset All Settings
Resets the machine's settings to their defaults
except the following:
• Language settings
• Country settings
• Network settings
• Fax destinations
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the
previous level of the menu tree without
clearing the settings.
• Reset Network Sett.
Resets the network settings to their defaults.
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the
previous level of the menu tree without
clearing the settings.
• Clear Address Book
Clears the fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial
destinations.
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the
previous level of the menu tree without
clearing the destinations.
PCL6 Mode
Admin. Tools
Lock
Set this to [Universal] when
using the Universal Driver
and to [SP
330/2300/3700/3710]
when using the normal
driver.
Specifies a four-digit
password for accessing the
[Address Book], [Network
Settings], [Setup Wizard],
and [Administrator Tools]
menus.
• Universal
• SP 330/2300/3700/3710
Default: [SP 330/2300/3700/3710]
• On (0000 to 9999)
• Off
Default: [Off]
Do not forget this password.
277
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
IPSec
Description
Selects whether to enable or
disable IPsec.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
Fax No.
Confirmation
Sets the machine to require a
fax number to be entered
twice when specifying a
destination manually.
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
When this function is
enabled, you cannot use the
On Hook Dial function.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
Save Scn Data
to USB
Specify whether to enable or
disable Scan to USB.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
RX File
Password
Setting
Specify a four-digit
password for accessing the
[Reception Settings] menu
and for accessing files of
received faxes in the
memory.
Do not forget this password.
278
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
• On (0000 to 9999)
• Off
Default: [Off]
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)
Printing the Configuration Page (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Print List/Report].
4. Press [Configuration Page].
5. Press [Yes].
Configuration Page
The following illustration is a sample of a configuration page.
279
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
XX/XX/20XX XX:XX
BootLoader[V.X.XX],Firmware[VX.XX],Engine[X.XX]
S/No.:XXXXXXXXXXX
Configuration Page 1/2
Model Name
System Settings
1
2
Administrator Tools
XX/XX/20XX
3
Print List/Report
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Scanner Features
Paper Settings
Address Book
Fax Features
Copier Features
DYG534
1. System Reference
Displays the model name, machine ID, and firmware version.
2. Note
The message "* denotes a non-default setting" is displayed in English despite the country setting. When a
value is changed from the default setting, an asterisk * appears next to the new value.
3. Setting Menu and Current Value
Displays the setting items and current values.
Types of Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
280
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
TX/RX Standby Files
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Dest.
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.
Fax Speed Dial Dest.
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
• By Speed Dial No.
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.
• By Name
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.
Scanner Dest. List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder
transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
Special Sender List
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.
• The average printing pages per job is shown in [P/J Information (AVE)] under [Total Counter] on
the maintenance page. A job means printing of a document from the start to the end. For example,
however, if the another job is consecutively added while the current document is being printed, not
2 but 1 is the number of the current job.
281
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Network Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.
• Depending on the model you are using, some items might not appear.
Wireless (Wi-Fi) Enable
Item
Wireless (WiFi) Enable
Description
Value
Select whether to enable or disable
Wireless LAN.
If [Disable] is set, [Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Sett.] is not displayed.
• Disable
• Enable
Default: [Disable]
Wired (Ethernet)
Item
Description
MAC Address
Displays the machine's MAC address.
Ethernet Speed Displays the current Ethernet speed
setting.
Value
–
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• No Ethernet Connection
Appears when a network cable
is not connected.
Set Ethernet
Speed
Specifies the speed for Ethernet
communication. Select a speed that
matches your network environment.
For most networks, the default setting is
the optimum setting.
• Auto Select
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
Default: [Auto Select]
282
Network Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
IPV4 Configuration
Item
IPV4 DHCP
IP Address
Description
Sets the machine to receive its IPv4
address, subnet mask, and default
gateway address automatically from a
DHCP server.
Specifies the machine's IPv4 address
when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current IP
address when DHCP is used.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the machine's subnet mask
when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current
subnet mask when DHCP is used.
Gateway
Address
Specifies the machine's default
gateway address when DHCP is not
used.
Use this menu to check the current
default gateway address when DHCP
is used.
IP Address
Method
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Displays the IP address acquisition
method.
• IP not ready
• DHCP
• Auto IP
• Manual Configuration
• Default IP
Wi-Fi Direct IP
Addr
Displays the IP address of Wi-Fi Direct.
–
IPV6 Configuration
Item
IPV6
Description
Select whether to enable or disable
IPv6.
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
283
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
IPV6 DHCP
Description
Value
Sets the machine to receive its IPv6
address from a DHCP server.
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
Manually Set
Address
Specifies the machine's IPv6 settings.
• Manually Set Address
Specifies the machine's IPv6
address when DHCP is not used.
Can contain up to 39
characters.
For details about entering
characters, see page 46
"Entering Characters (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Prefix Length
Specifies the prefix length, using
a value between 0 and 128.
• Gateway Address
Specifies the IPv6 address of the
default gateway. Can contain
up to 39 characters.
For details about entering
characters, see page 46
"Entering Characters (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
IP Address
(DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained
from a DHCP server.
Stateless
Address
Displays the IPv6 stateless addresses
obtained from a Router Advertisement.
–
• Stateless Address 1
• Stateless Address 2
• Stateless Address 3
• Stateless Address 4
Link-local
Address
284
Displays the IPv6 link local address.
–
Network Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Wireless (Wi-Fi) Sett.
Item
Wi-Fi Direct
Wireless (WiFi) Status
Description
Value
Enables devices to communicate
directly with each other without using a
central access point.
• Status
-
Displays the current connection
status.
• Mac Address
Displays the machine's MAC
address.
• SSID
Displays detailed information
about the SSID.
Network
Wizard
Displays the procedure for manually
connecting to a wireless LAN. It leads
you step-by-step through configuring
the settings for connecting with a
wireless LAN.
WPS
Connects with one touch using WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup). For details,
see Setup Guide.
Wi-Fi Direct
SSID
• Name
-
• PBC
• PIN
-
Displays the current SSID of the
machine.
• Password
Specify the password for Wi-Fi
Direct connection.
Wi-Fi Direct
Type
Select 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz as the
wireless LAN frequency.
• 2.4 GHz
• 5 GHz
Default: [2.4 GHz]
• Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.
285
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
@Remote (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
RC Gate Proxy Server
Item
Description
RC Gate Proxy
Server
Specify whether to use a proxy server.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Proxy Address
Specify the proxy server address.
-
Port Number
Enter the port number for the proxy
server.
(1 to 65535)
User Name
Enter the user name for logging in to
the proxy server.
-
Password
Enter the password for logging in to
the proxy server.
-
RC Gate Setup
Item
Description
Value
Request No.
Displays the request number issued by
@Remote.
-
Reference
Refers to the machine's registration
information.
-
RC Gate
Location
Displays the location of the machine as a result of the reference function.
Confirm the information and proceed
with the registration.
Registration
Registers the machine to @Remote.
-
• @Remote (At Remote) is an Internet-based support for remote management of digital multi-purpose
devices and laser printers. For more information about the settings, contact your sales or service
representative.
286
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Copier Features Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
Item
Select Paper
Description
Value
Specifies the paper size used for printing copies.
• Tray 1
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from
that tray only.
• Tray 2
When a paper size is selected, the machine
prints from the trays that contain the paper of the
specified size, except the bypass tray. If Tray 1
and tray 2 both contain the paper of the
specified size, the machine starts to print from the
tray specified as the priority tray in [Paper Tray
Priority] under [Tray Paper Settings]. If that tray
runs out of paper, the machine automatically
switches to the other tray to continue printing.
• A4
• Bypass Tray
• 8 1/2 × 11
• 16K
Default: [Tray 1]
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] and
[Bypass Tray] appear.
Sort
Configures the machine to sort the output pages
into sets when making multiple copies of a multipage document (P1, P2, P1, P2...).
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
287
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Original Type
Description
Specifies the content of originals, to optimize
copy quality.
Value
• Mixed
Select this when the
original contains both
text and photographs
or pictures.
• Text
Select this when the
original contains only
text and no
photographs or
pictures.
• Photo
Select this when the
original contains
photographs or
pictures. Use this mode
for the following types
of original:
• Photographs
• Pages that are
entirely or mainly
photographs or
pictures, such as
magazine pages.
Default: [Mixed]
Density
Specifies the image density for photocopying.
Increase the level (black
squares) to increase the
density.
Default: The default setting
is the middle of 5
adjustment levels.
288
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Reduce/Enlarge
Description
Specifies the percentage by which copies are
enlarged or reduced.
Value
• 50%
• 71%(A4->A5)
• 82%(B5J->A5)
• 93%
• 100%
• 122%(A5->B5J)
• 141%(A5->A4)
• 200%
• 400%
• Zoom 25-400%
• 50% (A4->A6)
• 65% (LT->HLT)
• 78% (LG->LT)
• 93%
• 100%
• 129% (HLT->LT)
• 155% (HLT->LG)
• 200% (A6->A4)
• 400%
• Zoom 25-400%
Default: [100%]
289
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Duplex/Combine
Description
Specifies combined copying. Select a copy
mode according to your original and how you
want the copy outputs to appear. For more
details, see page 121 "Copying Single-Sided
Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing"
and page 126 "Copying 2-Sided Originals with
2-Sided and Combined Printing".
Note that enabling combined copying
automatically disables ID card copying.
Value
• Off
• 1Sd 2Orig->Comb
2on1 1Sd
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb
4on1 1Sd
• 1 Sided Orig->2
Sided Copy
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb
2on1 2Sd
• 1Sd 8Orig->Comb
4on1 2Sd
• Manual 2 Sided Scan
Mode
Default: [1 Sided Orig->2
Sided Copy]
290
Copier Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
ID Card Setting
Description
Specifies the ID Card Copy setting.
Value
• ID Card Copy
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
• ID Card Center Line
Specify whether to
draw a center line
when making ID card
copy.
• Print
• Do not Print
Default: [Do not Print]
• ID Card Size
You can change the ID
card copy scanning
size.
• Horizontal: 50 to
148mm (1.90 to
5.83 inches)
• Vertical: 50 to
216mm (1.90 to
8.50 inches)
Default(horizontal ×
vertical): 57×88mm
(2.24×3.46 inches)
291
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Scanner Features Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
Item
Scan Size
Description
Specifies the scanning size according to
the size of the original.
Value
8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 ×5
1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, A4, B5, A5,
16K, Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Scanning
Mode
Specifies the scanning mode for blackand-white scanning using the control
panel.
• B&W
The machine creates 1-bit blackand-white images. Images contain
only black and white colors.
• Color
The machine creates 8-bit color
images. Images are full color.
• Gray Scale
The machine creates 8-bit blackand-white images. Images contain
black and white, and intermediate
gray colors.
Default: [B&W]
Max. E-mail
Size
Specifies the maximum size of a file that
can be sent by e-mail.
• 1 MB
• 2 MB
• 3 MB
• 4 MB
• 5 MB
• No Limit
Default: [1 MB]
292
Scanner Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Density
Description
Specifies the image density for scanning
originals.
Value
Increase the level (black squares) to
increase the density.
Default: The default setting is the middle
of 5 adjustment levels.
Resolution
Specifies the resolution for scanning the
original.
• 100 × 100dpi
• 150 × 150dpi
• 200 × 200dpi
• 300 × 300dpi
• 400 × 400dpi
• 600 × 600dpi
Default: [300 × 300dpi]
Compression
(Color)
Limitless Scan
Specifies the color compression ratio for
JPEG files. The lower the compression
ratio, the higher the quality but greater
the file size.
Sets the machine to request next originals
when scanning with the exposure glass.
• Low
• Medium
• High
Default: [Medium]
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
File Type
Specifies whether to create a multi-page
file containing all pages or separate
single-page files when scanning multiple
pages.
• Multi-page
• Single Page
Default: [Multi-page]
Note that a scanned file can contain
multiple pages only when the file format
is PDF or TIFF. If the file format is JPEG, a
single-page file is created for each
scanned page.
293
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
System Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD
Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
I/O Timeout
Item
USB
Network
Locked Print
294
Description
Specifies how many seconds the
machine waits for print data, if the
data is interrupted while it is being sent
from the computer via USB. If the
machine does not receive any more
data within the time specified here, the
machine only prints the data it has
received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports,
increase the timeout period.
Specifies how many seconds the
machine waits for print data, if the
data is interrupted while it is being sent
from the computer via network. If the
machine does not receive any more
data within the time specified here, the
machine only prints the data it has
received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports,
increase the timeout period.
Specifies how many seconds the
machine holds a new Locked Print file,
when the machine cannot store any
more Locked Print files. Within this
time, you can print or delete the new
Locked Print file. You can also print or
delete an existing Locked Print file so
that the new Locked Print file can be
stored in the machine.
Value
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
Default: [60 sec.]
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
Default: [15 sec.]
• 0 to 300 seconds, in increments
of 1 second
Default: [60 seconds]
System Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Fixed USB Port
Description
Specifies whether the same printer
driver can be used for multiple
machines or not under USB
connection.
Value
• Off
You must install the printer driver
separately for individual
machines, because the machine
other than the original will be
recognized as a new device
upon USB connection.
• On
The same printer/LAN-Fax
driver you have installed in your
computer can be used with any
machine other than the one
originally used for installation, if
the machine is of the same
model.
Default: [Off]
Export to NFC
Specifies whether or not to
synchronize the data you have
configured using the control panel and
Web Image Monitor with the data
stored in NFC.
You can read and write the data in
NFC by using the application
corresponding to the machine.
• Off
Does not synchronize the data
you have configured using the
control panel and Web Image
Monitor with the data stored in
NFC.
• On
Synchronizes the data you have
configured using the control
panel and Web Image Monitor
with the data stored in NFC.
Default: [On]
295
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Auto Continue
Item
Description
Auto Continue
Sets the machine to ignore an error
with paper size or type and continue
printing. The printing stops temporarily
when an error is detected, and restarts
automatically after about ten seconds
using the settings made on the control
panel.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
However, if the size of paper specified
on the control panel and that of the
paper loaded in the paper tray or the
paper size specified for the print job
do not match when printing restarts, it
may cause a paper jam.
Toner Saving
Item
Toner Saving
Description
Sets the machine to print using a
reduced amount of toner (for prints
made by the copier function only).
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Supplies Status
Displays information about consumables.
Item
Print Cart.
Description
Displays the remaining amount of
supplies.
Value
•
(New)
•
•
•
•
•
(Needs replacing)
Printer Registration
Adjust the registration of each tray if necessary. You can adjust the registration value between -15
and +15 (that is, -1.5 and +1.5 mm, in 0.1 mm increments).
296
System Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Default: 0 for all parameters
Item
Description
Horiz.: Tray 1
Select this to adjust the tray 1 registration horizontally.
Horiz.: Tray 2
Select this to adjust the tray 2 registration horizontally.
Vert.: Tray 1
Select this to adjust the tray 1 registration vertically.
Vert.: Tray 2
Select this to adjust the tray 2 registration vertically.
Horiz.: Bypass
Tray
Select this to adjust the bypass tray registration horizontally.
Vert.: Bypass
Tray
Select this to adjust the bypass tray registration vertically.
Horiz.: Duplex: Select this to adjust the registration of the back of duplex printing horizontally.
Back
Vert.: Duplex:
Back
Select this to adjust the registration of the back of duplex printing vertically.
Low Humidity Mode
Item
Low Humidity
Mode
Description
If the machine is used in a room where
humidity level is low, black lines of a
few millimeters thick may appear on
printouts with 75-millimeter spaces in
between. Selecting [On] for this setting
may prevent these lines from
appearing (wait for about one day
until this setting becomes effective).
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Note that when this setting is enabled,
the machine automatically performs
self-maintenance in every 10 minutes.
297
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Image Density
Item
Description
Image Density
Adjusts the density of images on prints.
Value
-3 to +3
Default: 0
298
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Fourline LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
List/Test Print
Prints lists showing configurations on the machine.
The lists will be printed using the tray set for [Printer] under [Paper Tray Priority] in [Tray Paper
Settings] on A4 or Letter size paper.
Item
Description
Test Page
Prints a test page for checking the single-sided printing condition. The test page
contains network settings.
PCL Font List
Prints installed PCL font list.
PS Font List
Prints installed PostScript font list.
Duplex Test
Page
Prints a test page for checking the duplex printing condition.
System
Item
Copies
Description
Sets the machine to print the specified
number of sets.
Value
1 to 999
Default: 1
This setting is disabled if the number of
pages to print is specified by the
printer driver.
Sub Paper
Size
Sets the machine to print onto paper of
another size if the specified paper is
not loaded in any tray. Alternative
sizes are preset to A4 and Letter.
• Auto
• Off
Default: [Auto]
299
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Default Page
Size
Description
Specifies the paper size to be used
when the paper size is not specified in
the print job.
Value
• A4
• A5 LEF
• A5 SEF
• A6
• B5 JIS
• B6 JIS
• 3 7/8 × 7 1/2
• 4 1/8 × 9 1/2
• 5 1/2 × 8 1/2
• 8 1/2 × 11
• 8 1/2 × 13
• 8 1/2 × 14
• 8.5 × 13.4
• 8.5 × 13.6
• 8.11 × 13.3
• 16K
• C5 Env
• C6 Env
• DL Env
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Duplex
Sets the machine to print on both sides
of paper according to the specified
binding method.
• None
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
Default: [None]
300
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Blank Page
Print
Description
Value
Sets the machine to print blank pages.
• On
When cover sheet printing is enabled
from the printer driver, cover sheets
are inserted even if you select [Off].
• Off
Default: [On]
Note that this setting has lower priority
than the printer driver's blank page
setting.
Print Error
Report
Sets the machine to print an error page
when the machine detects a printer or
memory error.
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
PCL Menu
Specifies conditions when using PCL for printing.
Item
Orientation
Description
Specifies the page orientation.
Value
• Portrait
• Landscape
Default: [Portrait]
Form Lines
Specifies the number of lines per page. 5 to 128
Default: 64
Default: 60
Font Number
Point Size
Specifies the ID of the default font you
want to use.
0 to 89
Specifies the point size for the default
font.
4.00 to 999.75
This setting is effective only for a
variable-space font.
You can change the value in 0.25
increments.
Default: 0
Default: 12.00 points
301
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Font Pitch
Description
Specifies the number of characters per
inch for the default font.
Value
0.44 to 99.99
Default: 10.00 pitch
This setting is effective only for fixedspace fonts.
Symbol Set
Specifies the character set for the
default font. The following sets are
available:
Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO L1, ISO L2,
ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850,
PC-852, PC-858, PC8-TK, Win L1,
Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text,
VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8,
PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal,
ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO
17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win
3.0, MC Text, ISO L6, ISO L9,
PC-775, PC-1004, Win Baltic
Default: [PC-8]
Courier Font
Specifies a courier-type font.
• Regular
• Dark
Default: [Regular]
Ext. A4 Width
Append CR to
LF
Resolution
Sets the machine to extend the width of
the printable area of A4 size paper,
reducing side margin width.
Sets the machine to append a CR code
to each LF code to print text data
clearly.
• Off
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
Specifies the print resolution in dots per
• 600 × 600 dpi
inch.
Default: [600 × 600 dpi]
PS Menu
Specifies conditions when using PostScript for printing.
302
• On
Printer Features Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
PS Resolution
Description
Specifies the print resolution in dots
per inch.
Value
• 600 × 600 dpi
• 1200 × 1200 dpi
Default: [600 × 600 dpi]
303
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
Item
Paper
Type: Tray
1
Description
Specifies the paper type for
tray 1.
Value
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Label Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Thick Paper 2
Default: [Plain Paper]
Paper
Type: Tray
2
Specifies the paper type for
Tray 2.
• Thin Paper
This setting appears only when
the optional paper feed unit is
installed.
• Thick Paper 1
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
304
Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Paper
Type:
Bypass
Tray
Description
Specifies the paper type for
bypass tray.
Value
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Label Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Envelope
• Thick Paper 2
Default: [Plain Paper]
305
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Description
Paper
Size: Tray
1
Specifies the paper size for tray
1.
Value
• A4
• A5 LEF
• A5 SEF
• A6
• B5 JIS
• B6 JIS
• 5 1/2 × 8 1/2
• 8 1/2 × 11
• 8 1/2 × 13
• 8 1/2 × 14
• 8.5 × 13.4
• 8.5 × 13.6
• 8.11 × 13.3
• 16K
• Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Paper
Size: Tray
2
Specifies the paper size for
Tray 2.
• A4
This setting appears only when
the optional paper feed unit is
installed.
• B5 JIS
• A5 SEF
• 5 1/2 × 8 1/2
• 8 1/2 × 11
• 8 1/2 × 14
• 8.5 × 13.4
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
306
Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Paper
Size:
Bypass
Tray
Description
Specifies the paper size for
bypass tray.
Value
• A4
• A5 LEF
• A5 SEF
• A6
• B5 JIS
• B6 JIS
• 3 7/8 × 7 1/2
• 4 1/8 × 9 1/2
• 5 1/2 × 8 1/2
• 8 1/2 × 11
• 8 1/2 × 13
• 8 1/2 × 14
• 8.5 × 13.4
• 8.5 × 13.6
• 8.11 × 13.3
• 16K
• C5 Env
• C6 Env
• DL Env
• Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
307
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Bypass
Tray
Priority
Description
Specifies how print jobs using
the bypass tray are handled.
Value
• Machine Setting(s)
The machine prints all print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
An error will occur if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not
match.
• Any Size/Type
The machine prints all print jobs according to the
printer driver’s settings.
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not
match. However, if the paper is too small for the
print job, the printed image will be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs
according to the printer driver’s settings and
prints standard size print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds
even if the paper size/type settings of the
machine and printer driver do not match.
However, if the paper is too small for the print
job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if
the paper size/type settings of the machine and
printer driver do not match.
Default: [Machine Setting(s)]
308
Tray Paper Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Description
Paper Tray
Priority
Specifies the tray that the
machine checks first for paper
that can be used for the job
when a tray is set to be selected
automatically.
If multiple trays contain valid
paper, the first tray the machine
finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of
paper, the machine
automatically switches to the
next tray to continue printing.
If Tray 2 is not installed, [Tray
2] does not appear.
Value
• Printer
Select a tray to check first when automatic tray
selection is specified for the print job.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
Default: [Tray 1]
• Copier
Select a tray to check first when [A4], [8 1/2 ×
11], or [16K] is selected for [Select Paper]
under [Copier Features].
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
Default: [Tray 1]
Size
Mismatch
Detection
Sets the machine to report an
error if the paper size does not
match the print job's settings.
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
309
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
Item
Description
Set Date/Time
Sets the date and time of the
machine’s internal clock.
(Default may differ
depending on the [Country]
setting.)
Value
• Set Date
Specifies the date of the machine’s internal
clock.
Only dates that correspond with the year and
month can be set. Incompatible dates will be
refused.
Default date format: [Day/Month/Year]
• Date format: Month/Day/Year, Day/
Month/Year, or Year/Month/Day
Year: 2000 to 2099
Month: 1 to 12
Day: 1 to 31
• Set Time
Sets the time of the machine’s internal clock.
Default date format: [24-hour Format]
• Time format: 12-hour Format, 24-hour
Format
AM/PM stamp: AM, PM (for 12-hour
Format)
Hour: 0 to 23 (for 24-hour Format), or 1
to 12 (for 12-hour Format)
Minute: 0 to 59
Function Priority
310
Specifies the mode that is
activated when the power is
turned on, or if the time
specified for [System Auto
Reset Timer] elapses without
activity while the initial
screen of the current mode is
displayed.
• Copier
• Scanner
Default: [Copier]
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
System Auto
Reset Timer
Description
Sets the machine to return to
the mode specified in
[Function Priority].
Value
• 30 sec.
• 1 min.
• 2 min.
• 3 min.
• 5 min.
• 10 min.
• Off
Default: [1 min.]
Energy Saver
Mode
Sets the machine to enter
Energy Saver mode, Energy
Saver mode 1 or Energy
Saver mode 2, to reduce
power consumption. The
machine recovers from
Energy Saver mode when it
receives a print job or one of
the keys on the control panel
is pressed.
• EnergySaverMode 1
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if
the machine has been idle for about 30
seconds. It takes less time to recover from
Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power
consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1
than in Energy Saver mode 2.
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
311
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Energy Saver
Mode
Description
Sets the machine to enter
Energy Saver mode, Energy
Saver mode 1 or Energy
Saver mode 2, to reduce
power consumption. The
machine recovers from
Energy Saver mode when it
receives a print job or one of
the keys on the control panel
is pressed.
Value
• EnergySaverMode 2
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2
after the period of time specified for this setting
is passed. The machine consumes less power
in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver
mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from
Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver
mode 1.
• Europe
• On (1 to 20 minutes)
• 30sec
Default: [30sec]
• Countries other than European countries
• On (1 to 240 minutes)
• 30sec
• Off
Default: [30sec]
312
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Language
Description
Value
Specifies the language used
on the screen and in reports.
• English
The default value for this
setting is the language you
have specified during the
Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
• Swedish
• Norwegian
• Danish
• Finnish
• Portuguese
• Czech
• Hungarian
• Polish
• Japanese
• Simplified Chinese
• Russian
• Brazilian Portuguese
• Turkish
• Traditional Chinese
• Arabic
• Kazakh
313
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Reset Settings
Description
Be sure not to clear the
settings by mistake.
Value
• Reset All Settings
Resets the machine's settings to their defaults
except the following:
• Language settings
• Network settings
Press the [OK] key to execute. Press the [Back]
key to exit to the previous level of the menu
tree without clearing the settings.
• Reset Network Settings
Resets the network settings to their defaults.
Press the [OK] key to execute. Press the [Back]
key to exit to the previous level of the menu
tree without clearing the settings.
Shortcut to
Function
PCL6
Admin. Tools
Lock
Assigns one of the following
functions to the [Shortcut to
Func.] key on the control
panel.
Set this to [Universal] when
using the Universal Driver
and to [SP
330/2300/3700/3710]
when using the normal
driver.
Specifies a four-digit
password for accessing the
[Network Settings], [Wi-Fi
Setup Wizard], and [Admin.
Tools] menus.
• ID Card Copy Mode
• Select Scanner Address
Default: [ID Card Copy Mode]
• Universal
• SP 330/2300/3700/3710
Default: [SP 330/2300/3700/3710]
• On (0000 to 9999)
• Off
Default: [Off]
Do not forget this password.
IPsec
Selects whether to enable or
disable IPsec.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
314
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
Description
Save Scn Data
to USB
Specify whether to enable or
disable Scan to USB.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
315
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Fourline LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
Printing the Configuration Page (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
DYG327
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print List/Report], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Configuration Page], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press [OK] in the confirmation screen.
Configuration Page
The following illustration is a sample of a configuration page.
316
Printing Lists/Reports (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
XX/XX/20XX XX:XX
BootLoader[V.X.XX],Firmware[VX.XX],Engine[X.XX]
S/No.:XXXXXXXXXXX
Configuration Page 1/2
Model Name
System Settings
1
2
Administrator Tools
XX/XX/20XX
3
Print List/Report
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Scanner Features
Paper Settings
Address Book
Fax Features
Copier Features
DYG534
1. System Reference
Displays the model name, machine ID, and firmware version.
2. Note
The message "* denotes a non-default setting" is displayed in English despite the country setting. When a
value is changed from the default setting, an asterisk * appears next to the new value.
3. Setting Menu and Current Value
Displays the setting items and current values.
Types of Lists/Reports (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
Scanner Address List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
317
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder
transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
• The average printing pages per job is shown in [P/J Information (AVE)] under [Total Counter] on
the maintenance page. A job means printing of a document from the start to the end. For example,
however, if the another job is consecutively added while the current document is being printed, not
2 but 1 is the number of the current job.
318
Network Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Network Settings (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.
• Depending on the model you are using, some items might not appear.
Wired (Ethernet)
Item
Description
MAC Address
Displays the machine's MAC address.
Ethernet Speed Displays the current Ethernet speed
setting.
Value
–
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• Ethernet Unavailable
Appears when a network cable
is not connected.
Set Ethernet
Speed
Specifies the speed for Ethernet
communication. Select a speed that
matches your network environment.
For most networks, the default setting is
the optimum setting.
• Auto Select
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
Default: [Auto Select]
319
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Item
Description
Value
Enable
Wireless (WiFi)
Select whether to enable or disable
Wireless LAN.
• Disable
If [Disable] is set, [Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Status], [MAC Address], [Current
Connection], [Input SSID], [WPS],
[Wi-Fi Direct], [Wi-Fi Dir. PWD], and
[Wi-Fi Direct Type] are not displayed.
Default: [Disable]
Wireless (WiFi) Status
Displays the current connection status.
-
MAC Address
Displays the machine's MAC address.
-
Current
Connection
Displays detailed information about
the connection, such as the SSID and
the wireless signal strength.
-
Input SSID
Input the SSID of the machine.
-
WPS
Connects with one touch using WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup). For details,
see Setup Guide.
• Enable
• PBC
• PIN
Wi-Fi Direct
Input the SSID of the machine to
configure Wi-Fi Direct.
-
Wi-Fi Dir.
PWD
Input SSID to set a password for Wi-Fi
Direct.
-
Wi-Fi Direct
Type
Select 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz as the
wireless LAN frequency.
• 2.4 GHz
• 5 GHz
Default: [2.4 GHz]
IPv4 Configuration
Item
DHCP
320
Description
Sets the machine to receive its IPv4
address, subnet mask, and default
gateway address automatically from a
DHCP server.
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
Network Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Item
IP Address
Description
Specifies the machine's IPv4 address
when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current IP
address when DHCP is used.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the machine's subnet mask
when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current
subnet mask when DHCP is used.
Gateway
Address
Specifies the machine's default
gateway address when DHCP is not
used.
Use this menu to check the current
default gateway address when DHCP
is used.
IP Address
Method
Value
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Displays the IP address acquisition
method.
• IP Not Ready
• DHCP
• Auto IP
• Manual Configuration
• Default IP
Wi-Fi Direct IP
Address
Displays the IP address of Wi-Fi Direct.
–
IPv6 Configuration
Item
IPv6
Description
Value
Select whether to enable or disable
IPv6.
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
DHCP
Sets the machine to receive its IPv6
address from a DHCP server.
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
IP Address
(DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained
from a DHCP server.
–
321
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Manual
Config.
Address
Description
Value
Specifies the machine's IPv6 settings.
• Manual Config. Address
Specifies the machine's IPv6
address when DHCP is not used.
Can contain up to 39
characters.
For details about entering
characters, see page 49
"Entering Characters (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Prefix Length
Specifies the prefix length, using
a value between 0 and 128.
• Gateway Address
Specifies the IPv6 address of the
default gateway. Can contain
up to 39 characters.
For details about entering
characters, see page 49
"Entering Characters (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
Stateless
Address
Displays the IPv6 stateless addresses
obtained from a Router Advertisement.
• Stateless Address 1
• Stateless Address 2
• Stateless Address 3
• Stateless Address 4
Link-local
Address
Displays the IPv6 link local address.
–
• Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.
322
Network Wizard (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Network Wizard (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
You can enable wireless connections by following the wizard's instructions. For details, see Setup Guide.
323
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
@Remote (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)
This function is available for SP 330SN only.
RC Gate Proxy Svr.
Item
Description
RC Gate Proxy
Svr.
Specify whether to use a proxy server.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Proxy Address
Specify the proxy server address.
-
Port Number
Enter the port number for the proxy
server.
(1 to 65535)
User Name
Enter the user name for logging in to
the proxy server.
-
Password
Enter the password for logging in to
the proxy server.
-
RC Gate Setup
Item
324
Description
Value
Request No.
Displays the request number issued by
@Remote.
-
Reference
Refers to the machine's registration
information.
-
RC Gate
Location
Displays the location of the machine as a result of the reference function.
Confirm the information and proceed
with the registration.
Registration
Registers the machine to @Remote.
-
@Remote (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
• @Remote (At Remote) is an Internet-based support for remote management of digital multi-purpose
devices and laser printers. For more information about the settings, contact your sales or service
representative.
325
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
326
8. Configuring the Machine Using
Utilities
This chapter describes how to configure the machine using utilities.
Available Setting Functions Using Web Image
Monitor and Smart Organizing Monitor
Use Web Image Monitor or Smart Organizing Monitor to change the configuration of the machine from
a computer.
Available operations for Web Image Monitor and Smart Organizing Monitor are as follows:
Available operations
Web Image Monitor
Smart Organizing
Monitor
Checking the system settings
Available
Available
Configuring paper settings
Available
Available
Adjusting the sound volume*1
Available
Unavailable
Configuring paper settings for copying
Available
Unavailable
Configuring fax settings*1
Available
Unavailable
Configuring the priority tray
Available
Available
Configuring toner saving
Available
Unavailable
Configuring interface settings
Available
Available
Configuring the shortcut to function
settings*2
Available
Unavailable
Registering destinations
Available
Unavailable
Checking the network settings
Available
Available
Configuring IPsec settings
Available
Available
Configuring Energy Saver Mode
Available
Available
Configuring administrator settings
Available
Unavailable
Printing lists/reports
Available
Available
327
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
*1 This function is available when using the touch panel model.
*2 This function is available when using the four-line LCD panel model.
328
Using Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.
• Some items can also be configured using the control panel.
Recommended web browsers
• Internet Explorer 6 or later
• Firefox 3.0 or later
• Safari 4.0 or later
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
To operate the machine via Web Image Monitor, you must first configure the machine's TCP/IP or
wireless LAN settings. For details, see page 282 "Network Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)" or see page 346 "Configuring the Network Settings".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
To operate the machine via Web Image Monitor, you must first configure the machine's TCP/IP or
wireless LAN settings. For details, see page 319 "Network Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD
Panel Model)" or see page 346 "Configuring the Network Settings".
329
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Displaying Top Page
When you access the machine using Web Image Monitor, the top page appears in your browser's
window.
1. Launch the Web browser.
2. In the Web browser's address bar, enter "http://(machine’s IP address)/" to access the
machine.
If a DNS server is used and the machine’s host name has been specified, you can enter the host
name instead of the IP address.
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
Top page
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
2
3
1
4
DYG344
1. Menu area
Clicking a menu shows its contents in the main area.
2. Tab area
Contains tabs for switching between information and settings you want to see or configure.
3. FAQs/Knowledge Base
Provides answers to frequently asked questions and other useful information about using this
machine.
An internet connection is required to view this information.
4. Main area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
330
Displaying Top Page
Information in the main area is not automatically updated. Click [Refresh] at the upper-right in
the main area to update the information. Click the Web browser's [Refresh] button to refresh
the entire browser screen.
2
3
4
1
5
DYG345
• If you use an older version of a supported Web browser or the Web browser has JavaScript and
cookies disabled, display and operation problems may occur.
• If you are using a proxy server, configure the Web browser settings as necessary. For details about
the settings, contact your network administrator.
• The previous page may not appear even if the back button of the Web browser is clicked. If this
happens, click the refresh button of the Web browser.
• The FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)/Knowledge Base are not available in certain languages.
Changing the Interface Language
Select the desired interface language from the [Language] list.
331
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Checking the System Information
Click [Home] to display the main page of Web Image Monitor. You can check the current system
information on this page.
This page contains three tabs: [Status], [Counter], and [Machine Information].
Status Tab
Item
Description
Model Name
Shows the name of the machine.
Location
Shows the location of the machine as registered on the [SNMP] page.
Contact
Shows the contact information of the machine as registered on the [SNMP]
page.
Host Name
Shows the host name specified in [Host Name] on the [DNS] page.
Device Status
Shows the current messages on the machine's display.
Status
Item
Print Cartridge
Description
Shows the amount of toner remaining.
Paper Tray
Item
Description
Tray 1
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of Tray 1.
Tray 2
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of Tray 2.
Bypass Tray
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of the bypass tray.
• If a non-genuine print cartridge is installed, toner life cannot be reliably indicated.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
332
Checking the System Information
Counter Tab
Page Counter
Item
Description
Printer
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer function:
Total number of pages printed using the printer function, and lists/reports
printed from the List/Test Print menu under Printer Features
Number of color pages
Number of black-and-white pages printed using the printer function
Scanner
Shows the following for pages scanned using the scanner function:
Total number of pages
Number of color pages
Number of black-and-white pages
Copier
Shows the following for pages printed using the copier function:
Total number of pages
Number of color pages
Number of black-and-white pages
Fax
Shows the following for telephone line faxes:
(only when using the
touch panel model)
Total number of pages sent and received
Number of pages sent
Number of pages received
Print Counter
Item
Description
Page Total
Shows the total number of all prints from the machine:
Pages printed using the printer, copy, and fax functions (when using the
touch panel model)
Pages printed using the printer and copy functions (when using four-line
LCD panel model)
Lists/Reports printed from the Print List/Report menu
Lists/Reports printed from the List/Test Print menu under Printer Features
333
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Duplex
Item
Description
Duplex Total Page
Shows the total number of sheets printed on both sides.
• A sheet printed on both sides counts as two printed pages.
Machine Information Tab
Machine Information
Item
334
Description
Firmware Version
Shows the version of firmware installed on the machine.
Engine FW Version
Shows the version of firmware for the machine engine.
Machine ID
Shows the identification number of the machine.
Fax Card (only when
using the touch panel
model)
Shows that a fax card is installed.
Total Memory
Shows the total memory installed on the machine.
Configuring the System Settings
Configuring the System Settings
Click [System Settings] to display the page for configuring the system settings.
When Using the Touch Panel Model
This page contains the following tabs: [Sound Volume Adjustment], [Tray Paper Settings], [Copier],
[Fax], Priority Tray, Toner Saving, and Interface.
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
This page contains the following tabs: [Tray Paper Settings], [Copier], [Priority Tray], [Toner Saving],
[Interface], and [Shortcut to Function].
Sound Volume Adjustment Tab
Sound Volume Adjustment
Item
Description
Panel Key Sound
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed from [Off],
[Low], [Middle], or [High].
Ring Volume
Select the volume of the ring when a call is received from [Off], [Low],
[Middle], or [High].
On Hook Mode
Select the volume of the sound from the speaker during on hook mode from
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Job End Tone
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is complete from
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Job Error Tone
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a fax transmission error
occurs from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Alarm Volume
Select the volume of the alarm that sounds when an operation error occurs
from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
• This tab appears only when using the touch panel model.
Tray Paper Settings Tab
Tray 1
335
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Description
Paper Size
Select the paper size for Tray 1 from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5 (148 × 210 mm), A5 (210 × 148 mm), B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2
× 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 5 1/2, 8.5 × 13, 16K (195 × 267 mm), 8.5 ×
13.4, 8.5 × 13.6, 8.11 × 13.3, Custom Size
Paper Type
Select the paper type for Tray 1 from the following:
Thin Paper (52 to 64g/m2), Plain Paper, Thick Paper 1 (100 to 130g/
m2), Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Thick Paper 2
(131 to 162g/m2)
Tray 2
Item
Description
Paper Size
Select the paper size for Tray 2 from the following:
A4, 8 1/2 × 11, B5 JIS, A5 (148 × 210 mm), 8 1/2 × 14, 8.5 × 13.4, 8
1/2 × 5 1/2
Paper Type
Select the paper type for Tray 2 from the following:
Thin Paper (52 to 64g/m2), Plain Paper, Thick Paper 1 (100 to 130g/
m2), Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper
Bypass Tray
Item
Description
Paper Size
Select the paper size for the bypass tray from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5 (148 × 210 mm), A5 (210 × 148 mm), B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2
× 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 8.5 × 13, 16K (195 × 267 mm),
Com10 (104.8 × 241.3 mm), Monarch (98.4 × 190.5 mm), C5 Env (162
× 229 mm), C6 Env (114 × 162 mm), DL Env (110 × 220 mm), 8.5 ×
13.4, 8.5 × 13.6, 8.11 × 13.3, Custom Size
Paper Type
Select the paper type for the bypass tray from the following:
Thin Paper (52 to 64g/m2), Plain Paper, Thick Paper 1 (100 to 130g/
m2), Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick
Paper 2 (131 to 162g/m2)
336
Configuring the System Settings
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Item
Bypass Tray Setting
Priority
Description
Select how print jobs using the bypass tray are handled.
• System Settings
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are
applied to all print jobs. An error occurs when the paper settings
specified by the printer driver or the print command do not match the
machine's settings.
• Any Size/Type
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the machine
and printer driver do not match, but if the paper is too small for the
print job, the printed image will be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs according to the printer
driver’s settings and prints standard size print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds even if the paper size/
type settings of the machine and printer driver do not match, but if the
paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not match.
Size mismatch detection
Item
Size mismatch
detection
Description
Select whether to set the machine to report an error if the paper size does
not match the print job's settings.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
337
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Copier Tab
Select Paper
Item
Select Paper
Description
Select the paper size used for printing copies from the following: [Tray 1],
[Tray 2], [Bypass Tray], [A4 (210 × 297 mm)], [Letter (8.5 × 11)], or [16K
(195 × 267 mm)].
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from that tray only. When a
paper size is selected, the machine checks the trays for the paper of the
specified size in the order of priority as set in [Copier] in the [Priority Tray]
page.
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be
used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
Separation Line
Item
Separation Line
Description
Specify whether to print a line in the middle of the printed paper when
making ID card copy or combined copy.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Fax Tab (Only When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Select Paper Tray
338
Configuring the System Settings
Item
Select Paper Tray
Description
Select the tray for printing faxes from the following: [Auto], [Tray 1], or
[Tray 2].
If [Auto] is selected, the machine uses Tray 1 and Tray 2 if they contain
paper of the same size. In this case, the machine starts to print from the tray
specified as the priority tray for [Fax] in the [Priority Tray] page. If that tray
runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the other tray to
continue printing.
Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes. Make
sure to select a tray that contains paper of the valid size.
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] appears.
Fax Number Confirmation
Item
Fax Number
Confirmation
Description
Enable this setting to configure the machine to require a fax number to be
entered twice when specifying a destination manually.
This setting appears only when the administrator password is set in the
[Administrator] page.
Fax Received File Processing
Item
Description
Received File
Processing
Select whether received faxes are stored into the machine's memory for
printing or forwarded to a destination specified for [Forwarding
Destination].
RX Image Auto
Reduction
Enable this setting to reduce the main scan line to fit to the printable area,
and then print the image in it after reducing the size of the image.
Print Automatically
Select whether the faxes received into the machine's memory are printed
automatically or stored for later manual printing.
339
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Notify Forward Status
Description
Select whether e-mail notifications are sent after forwarding faxes or not.
Email notification destination depends on how [Forwarding Destination] is
specified:
• If specified with [E-mail Address]: the notification will be sent to the
administrator e-mail address specified in [Administrator E-mail
Address] in the [Administrator] page.
• If specified with [Scan Destination]: the notification will be sent to the
notification destination specified for the selected scan destination.
Note that if a destination e-mail address is not specified, no notification will
be sent even if this setting is enabled.
Forwarding Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination.
• [E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address. Can contain up
to 64 characters.
• [Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding
destination.
Number of Trials of
Forwarding (time)
Specifies how many times the machine attempts to forward a fax (1 to 255
times).
Interval of Forwarding
Trial (min.)
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between forwarding
attempts (1 to 255 minutes).
2 Sided Print
Item
2 Sided Print
Description
Specify whether to print received faxes on both sides of paper.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
340
Configuring the System Settings
Priority Tray Tab
Priority Tray
Item
Printer
Description
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1], [Tray 2], or [Bypass Tray].
If automatic tray selection is specified for the print job and multiple trays
contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the
next tray to continue printing.
Copier
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1], [Tray 2], or [Bypass Tray].
If [A4 (210 × 297 mm)] or [Letter (8.5 × 11)] is selected for [Select Paper]
in the [Copier] page and multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the
machine finds will be used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the
machine automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
Fax (only when using
the touch panel model)
Select the tray that the machine uses first for printing out faxes from [Tray 1]
or [Tray 2].
If [Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] in the [Fax] page and both Tray
1 and Tray 2 contain paper of the same size, the machine starts to print
from the specified tray. If that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the other tray to continue printing.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Toner Management Tab
Toner Saving
Item
Toner Saving
Description
Enable this setting to print using a reduced amount of toner when printing
out copies.
341
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Interface Tab
Interface
Item
Fixed USB Port
Description
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Specifies whether the same printer/LAN-Fax driver can be used for
multiple machines or not under USB connection.
If this setting is enabled, the same printer/LAN-Fax driver you have
installed in your computer can be used with any machine other than
the one originally used for installation, if the machine is of the same
model.
If disabled, you must install the printer/LAN-Fax driver separately for
individual machines, because the machine other than the original will
be recognized as a new device upon USB connection.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
Specifies whether the same printer driver can be used for multiple
machines or not under USB connection.
If this setting is enabled, the same printer driver you have installed in
your computer can be used with any machine other than the one
originally used for installation, if the machine is of the same model.
If disabled, you must install the printer driver separately for individual
machines, because the machine other than the original will be
recognized as a new device upon USB connection.
NFC
Specifies whether or not to synchronize the data you have configured using
the control panel and Web Image Monitor with the data stored in NFC.
You can read and write the data in NFC by using the application
corresponding to the machine.
Locked Print Timeout
(seconds)
Specifies how many seconds the machine holds a new Locked Print file,
when the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files (0 to 300
seconds). Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file.
You can also print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
342
Configuring the System Settings
Shortcut to Function Tab (Only When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)
Shortcut to Function
Item
Shortcut to Function
Settings
Description
Assigns one of the following functions to the [Shortcut to Func.] key on the
control panel.
• [ID Card Copy Mode]
• [Select Scanner Destination]
343
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Registering Destinations
Scan and fax destinations can be registered using Web Image Monitor.
When Using the Touch Panel Model
Up to 100 scan destinations and 108 fax destinations (8 Quick Dial and 100 Speed Dial
destinations) can be registered. See the scan and fax sections for more information on registering
destinations.
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
Scan destinations can be registered using Web Image Monitor.
A maximum of 100 scan destinations can be registered. See the scan sections for more information
on registering destinations.
• For details about registering scan destinations, see page 142 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• For details about registering fax destinations using Web Image Monitor, see page 198
"Registering Fax Destinations".
344
Registering Fax Special Senders (Only When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Registering Fax Special Senders (Only When
Using the Touch Panel Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
Fax Special Senders can be registered using Web Image Monitor.
Up to 30 Special Senders be registered. For details about registering Special Senders, see page 223
"Receiving a Fax".
345
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Configuring the Network Settings
Click [Network Settings] to display the page for configuring the network settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Network Status], [IPv6 Configuration], [Network Application],
[DNS], [Auto E-mail Notification], [SNMP], [SMTP], [POP3], and [Wireless].
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.
• Depending on the model you are using, some items might not appear.
Network Status Tab
General Status
Item
Description
Ethernet Speed
Shows the type and speed of the network connection.
IPP Printer Name
Shows the name used to identify the machine on the network.
Network Version
Shows the version of the machine's network module (a part of the machine
firmware).
Ethernet MAC Address
Shows the Ethernet MAC address of the machine.
Active Interface
Shows the active communication method.
Wi-Fi Direct IP Address
Shows the IP address of Wi-Fi Direct.
TCP/IP Status
Item
346
Description
DHCP
Select whether the machine should receive a dynamic IPv4 address
automatically using DHCP. To use DHCP, select [Active]. When enabled,
the items below cannot be configured.
IP Address
Enter the IPv4 address for the machine.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the network.
Gateway
Enter the IPv4 address of the network gateway.
Configuring the Network Settings
IPv6 Configuration Tab
IPv6
Item
IPv6
Description
Select whether to enable or disable IPv6. You cannot disable IPv6 using
Web Image Monitor if the machine is currently in use in an IPv6
environment. In this case, use the control panel to disable [IPv6] under
network settings.
When disabled, [DHCP], [Manual Configuration Address], [Prefix Length],
and [Gateway Address] below cannot be configured.
IPv6 Address
Item
Description
DHCP
Select whether or not the machine obtains its IPv6 address from a DHCP
server.
IP Address (DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained from the DHCP server when [DHCP] is
set to [Active].
Stateless Address
Displays up to four stateless auto addresses.
Gateway Address
Displays the machine's default gateway address.
Link-local Address
Displays the link local address of the machine. The link local address is an
address that is valid only inside the local network (local segment).
Manual Configuration
Address
Enter the machine's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.
Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length, using a value between 0 and 128.
Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.
Network Application Tab
Scanner Send Setting
Item
E-mail
Description
Select to enable the Scan to E-mail feature.
347
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Description
Max. E-mail Size
Select the maximum size of scan files that can be attached to an e-mail
message (1 to 5 MB, or no limit).
FTP
Select to enable the Scan to FTP feature.
Folder
Select to enable the Scan to Folder feature.
Network Print Setting
Item
Description
IPP
Select to enable network printing using Internet Print Protocol (via TCP port
631/80).
FTP
Select to enable network printing using an embedded FTP server in the
machine (via TCP port 20/21).
RAW
Select to enable network raw printing.
Port No.
Enter the TCP port number to use for raw printing. The valid range is 1024
to 65535, except 5222, 5353, 6006, 28900, 29102, 49999, and
53550 (default is 9100).
LPR
Select to enable network printing using LPR/LPD (via TCP port 515).
mDNS Setting
Item
Description
mDNS
Select to enable Multicast DNS (via UDP port 5353). If disabled, the item
below cannot be configured.
Printer Name
Enter the name of the machine. Can contain up to 32 characters.
DNS Tab
DNS
Item
DNS Method
348
Description
Select whether to specify domain name servers manually or receive DNS
information from the network automatically. When set to [Auto-Obtain
(DHCP)], [Primary DNS Server], [Secondary DNS Server], and [Domain
Name] below become unavailable.
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
Primary DNS Server
Enter the IPv4 address of the primary DNS.
Secondary DNS Server
Enter the IPv4 address of the secondary DNS.
Domain Name
Enter the IPv4 domain name for the machine. Can contain up to 32
characters.
IPv6 DNS Method
Select whether to specify the domain server manually or have the machine
obtain its DNS information automatically.
When set to [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], [Primary IPv6 DNS Server],
[Secondary IPv6 DNS Server], and [IPv6 Domain Name] below become
unavailable.
Primary IPv6 DNS
Server
Enter the IPv6 address of the primary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up to
39 characters.
Secondary IPv6 DNS
Server
Enter the IPv6 address of the secondary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up
to 39 characters.
IPv6 Domain Name
Enter the IPv6 domain name of the machine. Can contain up to 32
characters.
DNS Resolve Priority
Select whether to give priority to IPv4 or IPv6 for DNS name resolution.
DNS Timeout (seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering a DNS
request to have timed out (1 to 999 seconds).
Host Name
Enter a host name for the machine. Can contain up to 15 characters.
Auto E-mail Notification Tab
E-mail Notification 1/E-mail Notification 2
Item
Description
Display Name
Enter a sender name for notification e-mail. Can contain up to 32
characters.
E-mail Address
Enter the address of the recipient of the alert email. Can contain up to 64
characters.
Paper Misfeed
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a paper jam occurs.
Out of Paper
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if paper runs out.
349
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Description
Replace Print Cartridge
Soon
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner becomes low.
Call Service
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if the machine
requires servicing.
Replace Print Cartridge
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner runs out.
Cover Open
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a cover is open.
SNMP Tab
SNMP
Item
SNMP
Description
Select whether to enable the machine to use SNMP services.
Trap
Item
Target Trap
Description
Select whether to enable the machine to send traps to the management host
(NMS).
When disabled, [SNMP Management Host 1] and [SNMP Management
Host 2] below become unavailable.
SNMP Management
Host 1
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to
64 characters.
SNMP Management
Host 2
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to
64 characters.
Community
Item
350
Description
Get Community
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Get requests. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
Trap Community
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Trap requests. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
Configuring the Network Settings
System
Item
Description
Location
Enter the location of the machine. The location entered here is displayed on
the main page. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Contact
Enter the contact information of the machine. The contact information
entered here is displayed on the main page. Can contain up to 64
characters.
SMTP Tab
SMTP
Item
Description
Primary SMTP Server
Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP/POP3 server. Can contain
up to 64 characters.
Port No.
Enter the port number for SMTP (1 to 65535).
Authentication Method
Select an authentication method from the following:
[Anonymous]: The user name and password are not necessary.
[SMTP]: The machine supports NTLM and LOGIN authentication.
[POP before SMTP]: The POP3 server is used for authentication. When
sending e-mails to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
User Name
Enter the user name for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Password
Enter the password for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Device E-mail Address
Enter the machine’s e-mail address.
This address is used as the sender's address of e-mail messages sent from
this machine, such as notification e-mails. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Server Timeout
(seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering an
SMTP operation to have timed out (1 to 999).
351
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Time Zone
Description
Select a time zone according to your geographic location. Selecting a
different time zone may cause transmission date and time to be incorrect for
email sent by the Scan to E-mail function, even when the machine's clock is
set correctly.
POP3 Tab
POP3 Settings
Item
Description
POP3 Server
Enter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server for e-mail reception.
The POP3 server specified here will be used for [POP before SMTP]. Can
contain up to 64 characters.
User Account
Enter the user name for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
User Password
Enter the password for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Authentication
Select an authentication method from the following:
[None]: Password will not be encrypted.
[APOP Authentication]: Password will be encrypted.
[Auto]: Password will be encrypted or not encrypted according to the POP3
server’s settings.
Wireless Tab
Wireless LAN Status
Item
352
Description
Wireless LAN Status
Displays the status of the connection to the wireless LAN.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address.
Communication Mode
Displays the communication mode that the machine is connecting in.
SSID
Displays the SSID of the access point that the machine is connected to.
Wireless Signal Status
Displays the strength of the wireless signal that is being received.
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Wireless
Description
Specifies whether or not to use the wireless LAN.
Wireless LAN Settings
Item
SSID
Description
Enter the SSID of the access point.
The SSID can contain up to 32 characters.
When you click [Scan List], a list of available access points is displayed.
You can select the SSID from the list.
Communication Mode
[Infrastructure] is selected by default. Therefore, connect the machine to a
wireless router or access point.
Authentication
Select an authentication method.
Encryption
Select an encryption method.
WPA Passphrase
If [WPA2-PSK] or [Mixed Mode WPA/WPA2] is selected for
[Authentication], enter the WPA encryption key.
WEP Key Length
If [WEP] is selected for [Encryption], select 64 bits or 128 bits for the length
of the encryption key.
WEP Transmit Key ID
Select an ID number to identify each WEP key in case multiple WEP
connections are configured.
WEP Key Format
Select a format for entering the WEP key.
WEP Key
Enter the WEP key. The number and type of characters you can enter vary
depending on the length and format selected for the key. See the following:
• WEP key length: [64bit], Format: [Hexadecimal]
WEP key max length: 10 characters (0-9, A-F, a-f)
• WEP key length: [64bit], Format: [ASCII]
WEP key max length: 5 characters (0x20-0x7e)
• WEP key length: [128bit], Format: [Hexadecimal]
WEP key max length: 26 characters (0-9, A-F, a-f)
• WEP key length: [128bit], Format: [ASCII]
WEP key max length: 13 characters (0x20-0x7e)
353
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
• If you are configuring the connection settings manually, check the SSID, authentication method, or
encryption key of the access point or wireless router in advance.
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Item
Description
Wi-Fi Direct Type
Select 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz as the wireless LAN frequency.
SSID
Enter the SSID name.
The SSID can contain up to 32 characters.
WPA Passphrase
Enter the passphrase for Wi-Fi Direct connection. You can enter 8 to 32
characters for a passphrase.
Google Cloud Tab
Google Cloud
Item
Description
Google Cloud Print
Specify whether to enable Google Cloud Print. When Google Cloud Print is
disabled, [Local Discovery] and [Timeout (seconds)] below cannot be
configured.
Registration Status
Displays the status of Google Cloud Print registration.
Registration Account
Displays the Account (e-mail address) of Google Cloud Print registration.
Local Discovery
Specify whether to enable local discovery.
Timeout (seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before an XMPP connection
times out.
Airprint Tab
Airprint
Item
Airprint
Description
Specify whether to enable or disable AirPrint.
If [Inactive] is set, you cannot set the following items.
354
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
AirPrint Use TLS
Specify whether or not to connect to the machine via TLS when using
AirPrint.
Printer Name
Input the machine name. The name can have up to 32 characters.
The "product name XXX" (XXX is the last three bytes of the Ethernet Mac
address) has already been entered by default.
Location
Input the location of the machine.
If you change settings for this item, those for [Location] in the [SNMP] tab
are also changed.
Latitude
Input the latitude of the machine's location.
Longitude
Input the longitude of the machine's location.
Altitude
Input the altitude of the machine's location.
Certificate Tab
You can use the following two types of certificates on this machine:
• Certificates created by the machine.
• Certificates issued by certification authorities.
You can install only one certificate on the machine.
If you execute [Create New Self-Signed Certificate], [Create Certificate Request], [Install Certificate], or
[Import Certificate and Private Key], the existing certificate on the machine is deleted.
Follow the procedure below to set items:
1. Check the item you want to set.
2. Enter the password if required.
3. Click [Next].
Certificate
Item
Create New SelfSigned Certificate
Description
Select this item to create a new self-signed certificate.
355
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Description
Create Certificate
Request
Select this item to request the certification authority to issue a new
certificate. You can submit a certificate created using this setting to the
certificate authority. Note that you cannot submit a certificate to the
certification authority directly via Web Image Monitor.
Install Certificate
Select this item to install the certificate issued by the certification authority.
Import Certificate and
Private Key
Select this item to install the certificate created by the machine.
You can use certificates that are in the following formats:
• PEM
• PKCS12
Export Certificate
Select this item to back-up the certificate installed on the machine. The
certificate is exported in PKCS12 format.
View Certificate
Select this item to check details about the certificate that is installed on the
machine.
Create New Self-Signed Certificate
Item
356
Description
Common Name
(Required)
Enter the common name of the certificate. The name can have up to 32
characters.
Organization
(Optional)
Enter the name of the organization requesting the certificate (company or
group name). The name can have up to 32 characters.
Organizational Unit
(Optional)
Enter the name of the department requesting the certificate (company or
group name). The name can have up to 32 characters.
City/Locality
(Optional)
Enter the name of the city or town where the machine is located. The name
can have up to 32 characters.
State/Province
(Optional)
Enter the name of the state or province where the machine is located. The
name can have up to 32 characters.
Country/Region
(Optional)
Enter the two-character country code for where the machine is located.
Validity Period (days)
(Required)
Enter the four-digit validity period. For example, if the validity period is a
year, enter "0365".
Configuring the Network Settings
Create Certificate Request
Item
Description
Common Name
(Required)
Enter the common name of the certificate. The name can have up to 32
characters.
Organization
(Optional)
Enter the name of the organization requesting the certificate (company or
group name). The name can have up to 32 characters.
Organizational Unit
(Optional)
Enter the name of the department requesting the certificate (company or
group name). The name can have up to 32 characters.
City/Locality
(Optional)
Enter the name of the city or town where the machine is located. The name
can have up to 32 characters.
State/Province
(Optional)
Enter the name of the state or province where the machine is located. The
name can have up to 32 characters.
Country/Region
(Optional)
Enter the two-character country code for where the machine is located.
Install Certificate
Item
File Name
Description
Click [Browse...], and then select the certificate to install.
Import Certificate and Private Key
Item
Description
File Name
Click [Browse...], and then select the certificate to install.
Password
Enter the password of the private key.
Export Certificate
Item
Description
Password
Enter the password of the private key. The password has 4 to 32
characters.
Confirm Password
Enter the same password as for [Password].
357
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Click [IPsec Settings] to display the page for configuring the IPsec settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [IPsec Global Settings] and [IPsec Policy List].
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
IPsec Global Settings Tab
Item
Description
IPsec Function
Select whether to enable or disable IPsec.
Default Policy
Select whether to allow for the default IPsec policy.
Broadcast and
Multicast Bypass
Select the services that you do not want to apply IPsec from the following:
All ICMP Bypass
Select whether to apply IPsec to ICMP packets (IPv4 and IPv6) from the
following:
[DHCPv4], [DHCPv6], [SNMP], [mDNS], [NetBIOS], [UDP Port 53550]
[Active]: All ICMP packets will be bypassed without IPsec protection.
"ping" command (echo request and echo reply) is not encapsulated by
IPsec.
[Inactive]: Some ICMP message types will be bypassed without IPsec
protection.
IPsec Policy List Tab
Item
Description
No.
IPsec policy number.
Name
Displays the name of the IPsec policy.
Address Settings
Displays the IP address filter of the IPsec policy as below:
Remote address/Prefix length
Action
358
Displays the action of the IPsec policy as "Allow", "Drop", or "Require
Security".
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Item
Status
Description
Displays the status of the IPsec policy as "Active" or "Inactive".
To configure IPsec policies, select the desired IPsec policy, and then click [Change] to open the "IPsec
Policy Settings" page. The following settings can be made on the "IPsec Policy Settings" page.
IP Policy Settings
Item
Description
No.
Specify a number between 1 and 10 for the IPsec policy. The number you
specify will determine the position of the policy in the IPsec Policy List. Policy
searching is performed according to the order of the list. If the number you
specify is already assigned to another policy, the policy you are
configuring will take the number of the earlier policy, and the earlier policy
and any subsequent policies will be renumbered accordingly.
Activity
Select whether to enable or disable the policy.
Name
Enter the name of the policy. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Address Type
Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the type of IP address to be used in IPsec
communication.
Local Address
Displays the IP address of this printer.
Remote Address
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device with which to communicate.
Can contain up to 39 characters.
Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length of the Remote Address, using a value between 1 and
128. If this setting is left blank, "32" (IPv4) or "128" (IPv6) will be
automatically selected.
Action
Specify how the IP packets are processed from the following:
• [Allow]: IP packets are both sent and received without IPsec applied to
them.
• [Drop]: IP packets are discarded.
• [Require Security]: IPsec is applied to IP packets that are both sent and
received.
If you have selected [Require Security], you must configure [IPsec Settings]
and [IKE Settings].
359
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
IPsec Settings
Item
Encapsulation Type
Description
Specify the encapsulation type from the following:
• [Transport]: Select this mode to secure only the payload section of
each IP packet when communicating with IPsec compliant devices.
• [Tunnel]: Select this mode to secure every section of each IP packet.
We recommend this type for communication between security
gateways (such as VPN devices).
Security Protocol
Select the security protocol from the following:
• [AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports authentication
only.
• [ESP]: Establishes secure communication that supports both
authentication and data encryption.
• [ESP&AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports both data
encryption and authentication of packets, including packet headers.
Note that you cannot specify this protocol when [Tunnel] is selected
for [Encapsulation Type].
Authentication
Algorithm for AH
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [AH] or [ESP&AH]
is selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
Encryption Algorithm
for ESP
Specify the encryption algorithm to be applied when [ESP] or [ESP&AH] is
selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[None], [DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]
Authentication
Algorithm for ESP
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [ESP] is selected
for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
Life Time
Specify the life time of the IPsec SA (Security Association) as a time period
or data volume. The SA will expire when the time period you specify
elapses or the volume of data you specify reaches the volume carried.
If you specify both a time period and a data volume, the SA will expire as
soon as either is reached, and a new SA will then be obtained by
negotiation.
To specify the life time of the SA as a time period, enter a number of
seconds.
To specify the life time of the SA as a data volume, enter a number of KBs.
360
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Item
Key Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Description
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).
IKE Settings
Item
Description
IKE Version
Displays the IKE version.
Encryption Algorithm
Specify the encryption algorithm from the following:
[DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]
Authentication
Algorithm
Specify the authentication algorithm from the following:
IKE Life Time
Specify the life time of the ISAKMP SA as a time period. Enter a number of
seconds.
IKE Diffie-Hellman
Group
Select the IKE Diffie-Hellman Group to be used in the generation of the IKE
encryption key from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
[DH1], [DH2]
Pre-Shared Key
Specify the PSK (Pre-Shared Key) to be used for authentication of a
communicating device. Can contain up to 32 characters.
Key Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).
361
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Printing Lists/Reports
Click [Print List/Report] to display the page for printing reports. Then, select an item and click [Print] to
print out information for that item.
Print List/Report
Item
Description
Configuration Page
Prints general information about the machine and its current configuration.
Fax Journal*1
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs. For
details about automatic fax journal printing, see page 247 "Fax Features
Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Fax TX/RX Standby File Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed,
List*1
sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Destination
List*1
Prints a list of Quick Dial entries.
Fax Speed Dial
Destination List*1
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
Scanner Destination List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and
Scan to Folder transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
*1 This function is available when using the touch panel model.
• Reports cannot be printed via Web Image Monitor if other jobs are printing. Before printing
reports, confirm that machine is not printing.
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
362
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Click [Administrator Tools] to display the page for configuring the administrator settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Administrator], [Reset Settings], [Backup Setting], [Restore
Setting], [Set Date/Time], [Energy Saver Mode], and [PCL6 Mode].
Administrator Tab
Administrator Settings
Item
Description
Change Password
(only when using the
touch panel model)
Check this to configure the administrator password.
New Password
Enter the new administrator password. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Confirm New Password Enter the same password again, to confirm.
Change E-mail Address Check this to configure the administrator e-mail address.
(only when using the
touch panel model)
Administrator E-mail
Address (only when
using the touch panel
model)
Enter the administrator e-mail address.
If the machine's e-mail address is not configured in the [SMTP] page, this
address will be used as the sender's address of e-mails sent from this
machine, such as notification e-mails. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Reset Settings Tab
Reset Settings
Item
Description
Reset Network Settings
Select to restore settings configured under the [Network Settings] and
[Administrator Tools].
Reset Menu Settings
Select to restore settings that are not related to the network to their defaults.
Clear Scan Destination
Select to clear the scan destinations.
363
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Description
Clear Address Book
(only when using the
touch panel model)
Select to clear the fax destinations.
Reset IPsec Settings
Select to clear the IPsec settings.
• [Reset IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.
Backup Setting Tab
• When sending the machine for repair, it is important that you create backup files in advance. The
machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.
Backup Setting
Item
Back up Network
Settings
Description
Backs up settings configured under the [Network Settings] and
[Administrator Tools].
Note that, however, [Max. E-mail Size] setting under [Network
Application] will not be backed up here; it will be backed up by [Back up
Menu Settings] instead.
Back up Menu Settings
Backs up settings that are not related to the network.
Back up Scan
Destination
Backs up scan destinations to a file.
Back up Address Book
(only when using the
touch panel model)
Backs up fax destinations to a file.
Back up IPsec Settings
Backs up the IPsec settings to a file.
Follow the procedure below to create configuration backup files.
1. Select the radio button for the type of data you wish to back up.
2. Enter the administrator password if required.
3. Click [OK].
364
Configuring the Administrator Settings
4. Click [Save] in the confirmation dialog box.
• [Back up IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.
Restore Setting Tab
• When the machine is returned from repair, it is important that you restore the machine's settings
from the backup files. The machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.
Restore Setting
Item
File to Restore
Description
Enter the path and name of the file to restore, or click [Browse...] to select
the file.
Follow the procedure below to restore configuration backup files.
1. Click [Browse...].
2. Navigate to the directory containing the backup file to restore.
3. Select the backup file, and click [Open].
4. Enter the administrator password if required.
5. Click [OK].
• If the settings are not restored successfully, an error message appears. Try again to restore the file
completely.
Set Date/Time Tab
Set Date
Item
Description
Year
Enter the current year (2000 to 2099).
Month
Enter the current month (1 to 12).
Day
Enter the current day (1 to 31).
365
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Date Format
Description
Select the date format from [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or
[YYYY/MM/DD].
Set Time
Item
Description
Time Format
Select 24- or 12-hour time format.
Time (AM/PM)
Select [AM] or [PM] if 12-hour time format is selected.
hour (0-23)
Enter the current hour if 24-hour time format is selected (0-23).
hour (1-12)
Enter the current hour if 12-hour time format is selected (1-12).
min. (0-59)
Enter the current minute (0-59).
Energy Saver Mode Tab
Energy Saver Mode
Item
Energy Saver Mode 1
Description
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 1 if the
machine has been idle for about 30 seconds.
It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy
Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.
Energy Saver Mode 2
• Europe
Select [30sec] or specify the period of time (1-20min) for the machine
to enter Energy Saver mode 2.
• Countries other than European countries
Select [30sec] or specify the period of time (1-240min) for the
machine to enter Energy Saver mode 2.
The machine consumes less power in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy
Saver mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2
than from Energy Saver mode 1.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
366
Configuring the Administrator Settings
The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax,
or when the [Power] key is pressed for less than 3 seconds.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Model
The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job or when the [Power]
key is pressed for less than 3 seconds.
PCL6 Mode
PCL6 Mode
Item
PCL6 Mode
Description
Set this to [Universal] when using the Universal Driver and to [SP
330/2300/3700/3710] when using the normal driver.
367
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Using Smart Organizing Monitor
The state and status information of the machine can be checked using Smart Organizing Monitor.
Displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor Dialog
1. On the [Start] menu, click [SP 330_3710_Series_Software Utilities].
2. Click [Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 330 3710 Series].
3. If the machine you are using is not selected, click [Connect Printer], and then do one of the
following:
• Select the machine's model.
• Enter the IP address of the machine manually.
• Click [Search Network Printer] to search the machine via the network.
4. Click [OK].
Checking the Status Information
1
3
4
5
2
DYG346
1. Image area
Displays the status of this machine with an icon.
368
Using Smart Organizing Monitor
2. Tab area
• Status tab
• Printer Name
• Print Cartridge
Displays the following messages to indicate remaining toner levels: Remaining Level 2 to 5,
"Almost Empty" and "Empty".
• Input Tray
You can check the following information about the input trays.
[Input Tray], [Status], [Paper Size], [Paper Type]
Displays the type of the paper loaded into each input tray.
• Maintenance
Displays the consumables statuses.
• System
Displays the system information about the printer, such as the model name, system version, and
memory size.
• Counter
Displays information about the counters.
• Network
Displays network details such as the printer's IP address and network-related information.
• Job Log tab
Displays the job log information.
• User Tools tab
Click to print lists or configuration pages, or to configure settings of the machine.
3. Message area
Displays the status of this machine with a message.
For details about error messages, see page 402 "Error and Status Messages Appear on Smart Organizing
Monitor".
4. [Connect Printer] button
Click to select a printer driver.
5. [Refresh:]
Specify the automatic update of the display.
Configuring the Machine Settings
Smart Organizing Monitor is used to modify the machine’s settings.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [SP 330_3710_Series_Software Utilities].
2. Click [Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 330 3710 Series].
369
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
3. If the machine you are using is not selected, click [Connect Printer], and then do one of the
following:
• Select the machine's model.
• Enter the IP address of the machine manually.
• Click [Search Network Printer] to search the machine via the network.
4. Click [OK].
5. On the [User Tools] tab, click [Printer Configuration].
6. Enter the access code, and then click [OK].
The default access code is “Admin”.
7. Change the settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [Close].
Access Code
The configurable functions depend on the authority of the access code you enter.
• Administrator
All tabs in the [Printer Configuration] dialog box are available.
• General users
Only the [Paper Input] tab is available.
Tab Settings
This section provides a tab-by-tab overview of the machine settings that can be modified using Smart
Organizing Monitor. For more information on each setting item, see the Smart Organizing Monitor
Help.
Paper Input tab
• You can change paper size and other paper settings.
Maintenance tab
• You can adjust print starting positions.
System tab
• You can set basic functions required to use the printer. The printer can be used on factory-set
defaults, but the configuration can be changed depending on the condition of the user.
• The changed condition holds even if the printer is turned off.
• The access code can be changed on this tab.
IPv6, Network 1, Network 2 and Network 3 tabs
• You can set configurations about network connection and communication.
370
Using Smart Organizing Monitor
• The following operations are possible on these tabs:
• Checking the printer name, active protocol, and other printer information
• Making interface settings, including the timeout setting and protocol settings
• Checking or making TCP/IP settings
• Checking or making SMTP, SNMP and IPsec settings
• Checking or making Alert settings
Wireless tab
• You can set configurations about wireless LAN network connection and communication.
• The following operations are possible on the tab:
• Checking the wireless LAN status
• Connecting wireless LAN manually
Printer tab
• You can set configurations about the printer.
@Remote tab
• You can configure the proxy server settings for using the @Remote service, and then register
the machine to the service.
Printing the Configuration Page
1. On the [Start] menu, click [SP 330_3710_Series_Software Utilities].
2. Click [Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 330 3710 Series].
3. If the machine you are using is not selected, click [Connect Printer], and then do one of the
following:
• Select the machine's model.
• Enter the IP address of the machine manually.
• Click [Search Network Printer] to search the machine via the network.
4. Click [OK].
5. On the [User Tools] tab, select [Configuration Page] in the [List/Test Print] list.
6. Click [Print].
Configuration Page
The following illustration is a sample of a configuration page.
371
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
XX/XX/20XX XX:XX
BootLoader[V.X.XX],Firmware[VX.XX],Engine[X.XX]
S/No.:XXXXXXXXXXX
Configuration Page 1/2
Model Name
System Settings
1
2
Administrator Tools
XX/XX/20XX
3
Print List/Report
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Scanner Features
Paper Settings
Address Book
Fax Features
Copier Features
DYG534
1. System Reference
Displays the model name, machine ID, and firmware version.
2. Note
The message "* denotes a non-default setting" is displayed in English despite the country setting. When a
value is changed from the default setting, an asterisk * appears next to the new value.
3. Setting Menu and Current Value
Displays the setting items and current values.
Types of Lists/Reports
Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
372
Using Smart Organizing Monitor
TX/RX Standby Files
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Dest.
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.
Fax Speed Dial Dest.
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
• By Speed Dial No.
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.
• By Name
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.
Scanner Dest. List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder
transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
Special Sender List
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
• The average printing pages per job is shown in [P/J Information (AVE)] under [Total Counter] on
the maintenance page. A job means printing of a document from the start to the end. For example,
however, if the another job is consecutively added while the current document is being printed, not
2 but 1 is the number of the current job.
373
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
374
9. Maintaining the Machine
This chapter describes how to replace supplies and how to clean the machine.
Replacing the Print Cartridge
• Store print cartridge in a cool dark place.
• Actual printable numbers vary depending on image volume and density, number of pages printed
at a time, paper type and size, and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.
Toner quality degrades over time. Early replacement of the print cartridge might be necessary.
Therefore, we recommend you always keep a new print cartridge ready.
• For good print quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
• The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use
of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
• Do not expose the print cartridge without its cover to direct sunlight for a long time.
• Do not touch the print cartridge's photo conductor unit.
DYG265
• Do not touch the ID chip on the top of the print cartridge as indicated in the illustration below.
375
9. Maintaining the Machine
DYG266
Messages on the screen
• Replace the print cartridge when "Replacement Required: Print Cartridge" appears on the
screen.
• Prepare a new print cartridge when "Replace Required Soon: Print Cartridge" appears on the
screen.
1. If paper is loaded in the bypass tray, remove the paper and close the bypass tray.
2. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then slowly lower it.
DYH062
3. Hold the center of the print cartridge and carefully raise it slightly and then pull it out
horizontally.
DYH063
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
376
Replacing the Print Cartridge
• Place the old print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
4. Take the new print cartridge out of the box.
DYG271
5. Take the print cartridge out of the plastic bag.
DYG272
6. Hold the print cartridge and shake it from side to side five or six times.
DYG273
Even distribution of toner within the bottle improves print quality.
377
9. Maintaining the Machine
7. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
DYH065
8. Carefully push up the front cover until it closes. Be careful not to trap your fingers.
After closing the front cover, wait until the initial screen is displayed.
9. Put the old print cartridge into the bag, and then put it into the box.
378
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you
discard it by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
•
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you
can recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.
Cautions When Cleaning
Cautions When Cleaning
Clean the machine periodically to maintain high print quality.
Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not sufficient, wipe with a soft, damp cloth that has
been wrung out thoroughly. If you still cannot remove the stain or grime, use a neutral detergent, wipe
over the area with a thoroughly-wrung damp cloth, and then dry wipe the area and allow it to dry.
• To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine
and thinner, or spray insecticide on the machine.
• If there is dust or grime inside the machine, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
• You must disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year. Clean away any dust and
grime from the plug and outlet before reconnecting. Accumulated dust and grime pose a fire
hazard.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
379
9. Maintaining the Machine
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed
Roller
If the friction pad or paper feed roller is dirty, a multi-feed or misfeed might occur. In this case, clean the
friction pad and paper feed roller as follows:
• Do not use chemical cleaning fluids or organic solvents such as thinner or benzine.
1. Turn off the power.
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Remove all the cables from the machine.
3. Pull out Tray 1 carefully with both hands.
DYH068
Place the tray on a flat surface. If there is paper in the tray, remove it.
4. Wipe the friction pads with a damp cloth.
DYG277
380
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller
5. Wipe the rubber part of the roller with a soft damp cloth. After that, wipe it with a dry
cloth to remove the moisture.
DYG278
6. Reload the removed paper into the tray, and then push the tray carefully into the machine
until it clicks into place.
DYH073
7. Insert the plug of the power cord into the wall socket securely. Connect all the interface
cables that were removed.
8. Turn on the power.
• If jams or multi-sheet feeds occur after cleaning the friction pad, contact your sales or service
representative.
• If Tray 2 is installed, clean its friction pad and paper feed roller in the same way as you did for
Tray 1.
381
9. Maintaining the Machine
Cleaning the Exposure Glass
1. Lift the ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Clean the parts indicated with arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same
parts with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
DYG282
382
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder
1. Lift the ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Clean the parts indicated with arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same
parts with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
DYG283
383
9. Maintaining the Machine
Moving and Transporting the Machine
This section provides cautions that you must follow when moving the machine both short and long
distances.
Repack the machine in its original packing materials when moving it over a long distance.
• Be sure to disconnect all cables from the machine before transporting it.
• The machine is a precision piece of machinery. Be sure to handle it carefully when moving it.
• Make sure to move the machine horizontally. Take extra caution when carrying the machine up or
down stairs.
• If Tray 2 is installed, remove it from the machine, and move them separately.
• Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the machine.
• Be sure to hold the machine level while carrying it. To prevent toner from spilling, move the
machine carefully.
• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the machine
in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will cause the
machine to malfunction.
Ventilation
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.
• Ventilation should be more than 30 m3/hr/person.
New machine smell
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.
1. Be sure to check the following points:
• The power switch is turned off.
• The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• All other cables are unplugged from the machine.
2. If Tray 2 is installed, remove it.
384
Moving and Transporting the Machine
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine, and then move it
horizontally to the place where you want to use it.
DYH051
4. If you have removed Tray 2, reinstall it.
• To move the machine over a long distance, pack it well and empty all the paper trays. Take care
not to tip or tilt the machine during transit.
• Toner might spill inside the machine if the machine is not kept level during transit.
• For more information about moving the machine, contact your sales or service representative.
Disposal
Ask your sales or service representative for information about correct disposal of this machine.
Where to Inquire
Contact your sales or service representative for further information about the topics included in this
manual or to inquire about other topics not included in this manual.
385
9. Maintaining the Machine
386
10. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for error messages and other problems.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Messages are listed in alphabetical order in the table below.
"X" indicates a number in an error code that appear differently depending on a specific situation.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen
and check the displayed message.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Model
If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, switch to copier mode and check the
displayed message.
387
10. Troubleshooting
Message
2XXX14
Causes
The machine was not able to
print the received fax, or the
machine's memory reached
capacity while receiving a fax
because the document was too
large.
Solutions
• The paper tray was empty. Load
paper in the paper tray. See page 56
"Loading Paper".
• The paper tray did not contain A4,
Letter, or Legal size paper. Load valid
size paper in the tray, and configure
the paper size settings under [Paper
Settings] accordingly.
• A cover or tray was open. Close the
cover or tray.
• There was a paper jam. Remove the
jammed paper. See page 404
"Removing Paper Jams".
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace
the print cartridge. See page 375
"Replacing the Print Cartridge".
• The received fax was too large. Ask
the sender to resend the document in
parts as several smaller individual
faxes, or to send at a lower
resolution.
ADF Original
Misfeed
Open ADF Cover
and remove paper.
ADF Orig. Misfeed
Open ADF Cover
and remove paper.
388
An original has been jammed
inside the ADF.
• Remove jammed originals, and then
place them again. See page 404
"Removing Paper Jams" and
page 417 "Paper Feed Problems".
• Check the originals are suitable for
scanning. See page 89 "Placing
Originals".
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Available: IDCard
Copy
A4/A5 SEF/
A6/8.5×11/5.5×8.
5
Causes
Solutions
ID card copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter,
A5, 5.5×8.5 inches, or A6 size.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Set the machine to print copies using
the A4 or Letter size paper in the
[Select Paper] setting. See page 239
"Copier Features Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Set the machine to print copies using
the A4 or Letter size paper in the
[Select Paper] setting. See page 287
"Copier Features Settings (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Specify the A4, Letter, A5, 5.5×8.5,
or A6 size paper for the tray selected
for printing copies. See page 266
"Paper Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Specify the A4, Letter, A5, 5.5×8.5,
or A6 size paper for the tray selected
for printing copies. See page 304
"Tray Paper Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
Available: 2 Sided
Copy
A4, LG, LT
8×13, 8 1/4×13, 8
1/2×13, 16K
This message appears only
when using the touch panel
model.
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter,
Legal, 8 × 13 inches, 81/2 ×
13 inches, Folio, or 16K.
• Select the tray containing the A4, B5,
Letter, or Legal size paper in the
[Select Paper] setting. See page 239
"Copier Features Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• Specify the A4, Letter, Legal, 8 × 13
inches, 81/2 × 13 inches, Folio, or
16K size for the tray selected for
printing copies. See page 266
"Paper Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
389
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Available: 2 Sided
Copy
A4/LG/LT
Causes
This message appears only
when using the four-line LCD
panel model.
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Legal, or
Letter.
Busy
390
Fax transmission could not be
completed because the
destination's line was busy.
Solutions
• Select the tray containing the A4,
Letter, or Legal size paper in the
[Select Paper] setting. See page 287
"Copier Features Settings (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• Specify the A4, Letter, or Legal size
for the tray selected for printing
copies. See page 304 "Tray Paper
Settings (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)".
Wait for a while and send the fax again.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Cannot Copy This
Setting
Comb.: 2 on 1 / 4
on 1
Causes
Solutions
Combined copying could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter, or
Legal size.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Set the machine to print copies using
the A4, Letter, or Legal size paper in
the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 239 "Copier Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Set the machine to print copies using
the A4, Letter, or Legal size paper in
the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 287 "Copier Features Settings
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Specify the A4, Letter, or Legal size
paper for the tray selected for printing
copies. See page 266 "Paper
Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Specify the A4, Letter, or Legal size
paper for the tray selected for printing
copies. See page 304 "Tray Paper
Settings (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)".
391
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Cannot copy.
Set original to ADF.
Causes
Solutions
Combined copying could not be
performed because the originals
were not placed in the ADF.
• Use the ADF, even when copying a
single sheet.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
If you need to use the exposure glass,
select [Off] or [Manual 2Sd Scan
Mode] in [Duplex/Combine] under
[Copier Features], and then try again.
See page 239 "Copier Features
Settings (When Using the Touch
Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
If you need to use the exposure glass,
select [Off] or [Manual 2Sdd Scan
Mode] in [Duplex/Combine] under
[Copier Features], and then try again.
See page 287 "Copier Features
Settings (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)".
Check Paper Size
The paper size set for the
document differs from the size of
the paper in the indicated tray.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Press [Form Feed] to begin printing,
or press [Job Reset] to cancel the job.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Press the [OK] key to begin printing,
or press the [Back] key to cancel the
job.
Check Paper Type
The paper type set for the
document differs from the type
of the paper in the indicated
tray.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Press [Form Feed] to begin printing,
or press [Job Reset] to cancel the job.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Press the [OK] key to begin printing,
or press the [Back] key to cancel the
job.
392
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Connection Failed
Causes
Solutions
The line could not be connected
correctly.
• Confirm that the telephone line is
properly connected to the machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line from
the machine, and connect a standard
telephone in its place. Confirm that
you can make calls using the
telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone
company.
Cover open
A cover is open.
Dial Failed
The fax could not be sent.
Close the cover completely.
• Confirm that the fax number you
dialed is correct.
• Confirm that the destination is a fax
machine.
• Confirm that the line is not busy.
• You may need to insert a pause
between dial digits. Press [Redial]
after, for example, the area code.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Check that [PSTN / PBX] in
[Administrator Tools] has been
specified in accordance with the
telephone line in use. See page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Check that [PSTN / PBX] in [Admin.
Tools] has been specified in
accordance with the telephone line in
use. See page 310 "Administrator
Tools Settings (When Using the Fourline LCD Panel Model)".
393
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Exceeded MaxE-mail The scan file exceeds the size
Size
limit for files that can be sent
through e-mail.
Solutions
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Configure [Resolution] under [Scan
Settings] to reduce the scanning
resolution. See page 244 "Scanner
Features Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Configure [Resolution] under [Scan
Settings] to reduce the scanning
resolution. See page 292 "Scanner
Features Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Configure [Maximum Email Size]
under [Scan Settings] to increase the
allowed size. See page 244
"Scanner Features Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Configure [Max. E-mail Size] under
[Scan Settings] to increase the
allowed size. See page 292
"Scanner Features Settings (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
Independent-supply
Toner: Black
This message appears only
when using the touch panel
model.
Remove and replace it with a print
cartridge specified by an authorized
dealer.
A non-supported print cartridge
is installed.
Indep.Sply.Prt.Cart.
This message appears only
when using the four-line LCD
panel model.
A non-supported print cartridge
is installed.
394
Remove and replace it with a print
cartridge specified by an authorized
dealer.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
Internal Misfeed
Paper has been jammed in the
machine.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Memory Overflow
The number of fax jobs in
memory (unsent or unprinted
faxes) has reached maximum,
so new jobs cannot be stored.
Wait until pending jobs have been
transmitted or printed.
Memory Overflow
The data is too large or
complex to print.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Select [600 × 600 dpi] in
[Resolution] under [Printer Features]
to reduce the size of data. See
page 262 "Printer Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Select [600 × 600 dpi] in
[Resolution] under [Printer Features]
to reduce the size of data. See
page 299 "Printer Features Settings
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• If using the PCL6 printer driver, set
[Resolution] in the [Print Quality] tab
to [600 × 600 dpi].
Memory Overflow
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
scanning the first page of
the original to store a fax
job in memory before
transmission.
Resend the fax in parts as several smaller
individual faxes, or send at a lower
resolution.
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
storing a fax in memory in
Memory Transmission
mode.
395
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Misfeed: Duplex Unit
Remove Paper
Causes
This message appears only
when using the touch panel
model.
Solutions
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Paper has been jammed in the
duplex unit.
Misfeed: Dup. Unit
This message appears only
when using the four-line LCD
panel model.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Paper has been jammed in the
duplex unit.
Misfeed: BypassTray
Paper has been jammed in the
bypass tray.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Misfeed: Standard
Tray
This message appears only
when using the touch panel
model.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Paper has been jammed in the
paper exit area.
Misfeed: Main Tray
This message appears only
when using the four-line LCD
panel model.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Paper has been jammed in the
paper exit area.
Misfeed: Tray 1
Paper has been jammed in the
tray 1 paper input area.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Misfeed: Tray 2
Paper has been jammed in the
paper tray.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
Net Communication
Error
Connection with the server was
lost while sending or receiving
data.
Contact the network administrator.
Network is not Ready A scanned file could not be sent
because the machine has not
received IP address information
from the DHCP server
completely.
396
Wait until the machine receives the IP
address information completely, and then
try the operation again.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
On Hook or Stop key The machine has been off-hook
for an extended period of time.
Put down the handset phone or press the
[Clear/Stop] key.
Out of Paper: X
The indicated tray has run out of
paper.
Load paper to the indicated tray. See
page 56 "Loading Paper".
Please Restart the
Machine
The machine needs to be
restarted.
Turn off the power, and then turn it back
on.
Replace Required
Soon:
The print cartridge is almost
empty.
Prepare a new print cartridge.
The machine has run out of
toner.
Replace the print cartridge. See page 375
"Replacing the Print Cartridge".
RX Communication
Error
A reception error occurred, and
the fax could not be received
correctly.
If possible, contact the sender of the fax
and ask them to resend it.
Scan (NW)
Disconnected
A scanned file could not be sent
because the Ethernet cable was
not connected properly.
Reconnect the Ethernet cable properly,
and then try the operation again.
Scan (USB)
Disconnected
The USB cable was
disconnected while scanning
from a computer.
Reconnect the USB cable properly, and
then try the operation again.
Server Connection
Failed
A scanned file could not be sent
because the destination could
not be reached.
Confirm that the destination is registered
correctly, and then try the operation again.
Server Response
Error
An error occurred in
communication with the server
before beginning transmission.
Confirm that the destination is registered
correctly, and then try the operation again.
Print Cartridge
Replacement
Required:
Print Cartridge
SCXXX
A fatal hardware error has
occurred, and the machine
cannot function.
If the problem could not be solved, contact
the network administrator.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
397
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
Service call - X
A fatal hardware error has
occurred, and the machine
cannot function.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Set Correct Paper
The tray selected in [Select
Paper Tray] under [Fax
Features] does not contain A4,
Letter, or Legal size paper.
While the message is displayed, press [Set
Size]. A menu for changing the paper size
of the current tray appears.
Load A4/Letter/ Legal size paper in the
tray, and then select the corresponding
paper size.
Note that the paper size setting for the tray
under [Paper Settings] will be changed.
See page 266 "Paper Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Set Original to ADF
Cannot use exposure
glass
with set. in [Scan
Size].
398
Scanning could not be
performed because the originals
were not placed in the ADF,
even though the machine is set
to scan originals larger than
A4/Letter size.
• Use the ADF, even when scanning
A4/Letter or smaller size originals.
• If you need to use the exposure glass,
set A4/Letter or smaller size in [Scan
Size] under [Scan Settings], and then
try again. See page 187 "Specifying
Scan Settings for Scanning".
Sort Copy was
Cancelled
The machine's memory reached
capacity while originals were
being scanned from the ADF to
perform sort copying.
Press [Exit] to print the originals that were
successfully scanned into memory. Then,
copy again the originals left in the ADF.
TX Communication
Error
A transmission error occurred,
and the fax could not be
transmitted correctly.
If the [Auto Redial] setting is enabled, the
machine will redial the number and try
again. If all attempts fail, or if the machine
is in Immediate Transmission mode, the fax
will not be transmitted. Try the operation
again.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Unavailable Paper
Type
Causes
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid type
paper, which is thin, plain,
recycled, color, preprinted,
thick 1, letterhead, special, or
prepunched.
Solutions
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Specify the tray containing the valid
type paper (other than the bypass
tray) in the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 239 "Copier Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Specify the tray containing the valid
type paper (other than the bypass
tray) in the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 287 "Copier Features Settings
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Specify the valid paper type for the
tray selected for printing copies. See
page 266 "Paper Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model
Specify the valid paper type for the
tray selected for printing copies. See
page 304 "Tray Paper Settings
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
Unsupported Device
Please Remove
The Scan to USB function failed
because a USB device other
than a USB flash disk or a USB
flash disk with an unsupported
file system was used.
Use a USB flash disk that is compatible
with the Scan to USB function.
USB Disconnected
The Scan to USB function failed
because the USB flash disk was
removed before the operation
could be completed.
Check that the USB flash disk is securely
inserted in the machine. Do not pull out the
USB flash disk until "Ready" appears on
the display.
Press Clear key
399
10. Troubleshooting
• The message about fax function appears only when using the touch panel model.
400
Panel Indicator
Panel Indicator
The following table explains the meaning of the various indicator patterns that the printer alerts to users
about its conditions.
Indicator patterns
Cause
The Alert indicator is lit.
The printer cannot be used normally. Check the
error on the control panel.
The Alert indicator is flashing.
Toner has nearly run out.
The Data In indicator is flashing.
The printer is receiving print data from a
computer.
The Data In indicator is lit.
There is data to be printed.
The Power indicator is lit.
The power is on.
401
10. Troubleshooting
Error and Status Messages Appear on Smart
Organizing Monitor
Message
Causes
Solutions
No Response from
I/O Device
• The power cable of the
machine is not plugged in.
• Check the printer power cord.
Check the cable,
power cord, and
main switch.
• The power of the machine
is not turned ON.
• Check the USB cable is properly
connected.
Tray Not Detected or
No Paper
• Tray 1 has run out of
paper.
• Load paper into Tray 1. See page 56
"Loading Paper".
The indicated paper
source tray is not set
properly, or no
paper loaded.
• The bypass tray has run out
of paper.
• Load paper into the bypass tray. See
page 56 "Loading Paper".
• Check the printer power switch is on.
• The USB cable is not
connected.
Check the indicated
tray.
Tray 1 Jam
Bypass Tray Jam
A paper jam has occurred in the
machine.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams" and
page 417 "Paper Feed Problems".
The paper size specified on the
machine and the size specified
in the printer driver do not
match.
For details about specifying the paper size
setting on the machine, see page 55
"Paper Specifications and Adding Paper".
For details about changing the paper size
setting in the printer driver, see the printer
driver Help.
Duplex Jam
Inner Jam
Outer Jam
Total Jam
Paper Size Mismatch
Paper of the selected
paper size is not
loaded in the
indicated paper
source tray.
Check the indicated
tray.
402
Error and Status Messages Appear on Smart Organizing Monitor
Message
Causes
Solutions
The paper type specified on the
machine and the type specified
in the printer driver do not
match.
For details about changing the paper type
setting of the machine, see page 55
"Paper Specifications and Adding Paper".
For details about changing the paper type
setting in the printer driver, see the printer
driver Help.
Print Cartridge is
near empty.
The print cartridge is almost
empty.
Prepare a new print cartridge.
Shortly printing
becomes not
available. Please
keep Print Cartridge
handy.
The machine has run out of the
toner.
Replace the print cartridge. See page 375
"Replacing the Print Cartridge".
Printing has been
interrupted because
of the memory
overflow.
The data is too large or
complex to print.
Select [600 x 600 dpi] in [Resolution] to
reduce the size of data. For details, see the
printer driver Help.
No Toner or Waste
Toner full
The print cartridge has not been
installed.
Replace the print cartridge. See page 375
"Replacing the Print Cartridge".
Paper Type
Mismatch
Paper of the selected
paper type is not
loaded in the
indicated paper
source tray.
Check the indicated
tray.
No printing is
available.
Open the indicated
cover, and then
replace Print
Cartridge.
403
10. Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, one of the following messages appears on the control panel:
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen
and check the displayed message.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, switch to copier mode and check the
displayed message.
Message
Internal Misfeed
Misfeed: Tray 1
Reference title
See page 405 "Removing jammed paper from
Tray 1".
Misfeed: Tray 2
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Misfeed: Paper Tray
See page 407 "Removing jammed paper from
the bypass tray".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
Misfeed: BypassTray
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Misfeed: Duplex Unit
See page 409 "Removing jammed paper from
the standard tray or duplex unit"".
Remove Paper
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
Misfeed: Dup. Unit
Remove Paper
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
Misfeed: Standard Tray
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
Misfeed: Main Tray
ADF Original Misfeed
Open ADF Cover
and Remove paper
404
See page 414 "Removing Scanning Jams"
Removing Paper Jams
See the section identified by the message and remove the jammed paper accordingly.
Removing Printing Jams
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• Jammed paper may be covered in toner. Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothes.
• Toner on prints made immediately after clearing a paper jam may be insufficiently fused and may
smudge. Make test prints until smudges no longer appear.
• Do not forcefully remove jammed paper, as it may tear. Torn pieces remaining inside the machine
will cause further jams and possibly damage the machine.
• Paper jam can cause pages to be lost. Check your print job for missing pages and reprint any
pages that did not print out.
Removing jammed paper from Tray 1
If "Internal Misfeed", "Misfeed: Tray 1", or "Misfeed: Tray 2" appears on the display, follow the
procedure below to remove it.
The following example explains the removing procedure for the standard paper tray (Tray 1).
The same procedure applies to remove jammed paper from Tray 2.
1. Pull tray 1 halfway out, and check for jammed paper. If there is jammed paper, remove it
carefully.
DYG288
405
10. Troubleshooting
2. Carefully slide tray 1 back in until it stops.
3. If paper is loaded in the bypass tray, remove the paper.
4. Close the bypass tray.
5. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
DYH062
6. Hold the center of the print cartridge and carefully raise it slightly and then pull it out
horizontally.
DYH063
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
7. Lifting the guide plate, remove the jammed paper carefully.
DYG290
406
Removing Paper Jams
8. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
DYH065
9. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
Removing jammed paper from the bypass tray
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
If "Misfeed: Paper Tray" appears on the display, follow the procedure below to remove it.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
If "Misfeed: BypassTray" appears on the display, follow the procedure below to remove it.
1. If paper is jammed in the bypass tray input area, remove the jammed paper carefully.
DYG292
2. Close the bypass tray.
407
10. Troubleshooting
3. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
DYH062
4. Hold the center of the print cartridge and carefully raise it slightly and then pull it out
horizontally.
DYH063
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
5. Lift the A lever, and then remove the jammed paper carefully.
DYG290
408
Removing Paper Jams
6. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
DYH065
7. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
Removing jammed paper from the standard tray or duplex unit
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
If "Misfeed: Standard Tray" or "Misfeed: Duplex Unit" appears on the display, follow the
procedure below to remove it.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
If "Misfeed: Main Tray" or "Misfeed: Dup. Unit" appears on the display, follow the procedure
below to remove it.
1. Open the rear cover.
DYG296
409
10. Troubleshooting
2. Hold down the B lever.
DYG298
3. Remove the jammed paper carefully.
DYG300
4. Lift the Z lever.
DYG530
410
Removing Paper Jams
5. Remove the jammed paper carefully.
DYG531
6. Close the rear cover.
DYH061
7. Pull tray 1 halfway out, and check for jammed paper. If there is jammed paper, remove it
carefully.
DYG288
411
10. Troubleshooting
8. Pull tray 1 out completely with both hands.
DYG304
Place the tray on a flat surface.
9. Push the lever.
Pushing the lever lowers the duplex transport unit.
DYG306
10. If there is jammed paper, carefully remove it.
DYG308
412
Removing Paper Jams
11. With the duplex transport unit still lowered, carefully slide tray 1 back in until it stops.
DYG310
12. If paper is loaded in the bypass tray, remove the paper and close the bypass tray.
13. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
DYH062
14. Hold the center of the print cartridge and carefully raise it slightly and then pull it out
horizontally.
DYH063
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
413
10. Troubleshooting
15. Lift the A lever, and then remove the jammed paper carefully.
DYG290
16. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
DYH065
17. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
• When closing the covers, push the covers firmly. After closing the covers, check that the error is
cleared.
Removing Scanning Jams
• Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
If a paper jam occurs in the ADF, follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.
414
Removing Paper Jams
1. Open the ADF cover.
DYG312
2. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
Be careful not to pull the original too hard, as it may rip.
DYG313
3. Close the ADF cover and the cover of the input tray for ADF.
4. Lift the ADF, and if there is any original remaining in the ADF, gently pull the jammed
paper to remove it.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF. Doing so may damage the tray.
DYG314
5. Lower the ADF.
415
10. Troubleshooting
When You Cannot Print Test Page
Possible cause
The power cord, a USB cable, or a
network cable is not connected
correctly.
The port connection is not
established correctly.
Solution
Make sure that the power cord, USB cable, and network
cable are connected correctly. Also confirm that they are not
damaged.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Settings].
2. Click [Devices].
3. Click [Printers & scanners], and then click [Devices and
printers] in Related Settings.
4. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
5. Click [Printing preferences].
6. Click the [Ports] tab, and then make sure that the port is
set as a USB or network printer.
416
Paper Feed Problems
Paper Feed Problems
If the machine is operating but paper will not feed or paper jams occur frequently, check the condition of
the machine and paper.
Problem
Paper does not feed smoothly.
Solution
• Use supported types of paper. See page 74 "Supported
Paper".
• Load paper correctly, making sure that the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the
bypass tray are properly adjusted. See page 56
"Loading Paper".
• If the paper is curled, straighten the paper.
• Take out the paper from tray and fan it well. Then,
reverse the top and bottom of the paper, and put it back
in the tray.
Paper jams occur frequently.
• If there are gaps between the paper and the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the
bypass tray, adjust the side or end fences of the paper
tray, or the paper guides of the bypass tray to remove the
gaps.
• Avoid printing on both sides of paper when printing
images that contain large solid areas, which consume a
lot of toner.
• Use supported types of paper. See page 74 "Supported
Paper".
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the side fence.
• Make sure that the friction pads and paper feed rollers
are clean. See page 380 "Cleaning the Friction Pad and
Paper Feed Roller".
417
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Multiple sheets of paper are fed at
one time.
Solution
• Fan the paper well before loading. Also make sure that
the edges are even by tapping the stack on a flat surface
such as a desk.
• Make sure that the side or end fences are in the right
position.
• Use supported types of paper. See page 74 "Supported
Paper".
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the side fence.
• Make sure that the friction pads and paper feed rollers
are clean.
• Check that paper was not added while there was still
some left in the tray. Only add paper when there is none
left in the tray.
Paper gets wrinkles.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
See page 74 "Supported Paper".
• Paper is too thin. See page 74 "Supported Paper".
• If there are gaps between the paper and the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the
bypass tray, adjust the side or end fences of the paper
tray, or the paper guides of the bypass tray to remove the
gaps.
The printed paper is curled.
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.
• If the paper curl is severe, take prints from the output tray
more frequently.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
See page 74 "Supported Paper".
418
Paper Feed Problems
Problem
The printed paper does not stack
neatly.
Solution
• The machine cannot detect the paper that is on the output
tray, so make sure that the stack of paper that is output
does not exceed the capacity of the output tray.
• Are you printing on different sizes or types of paper? If
you are printing on different sizes or types of paper,
remove the printed pages from the output tray as they are
output.
• If you are printing a combination of both single-sided
and two-sided documents, remove the printed pages
from the output tray more frequently.
Images are not printed in the right
position
Adjust the front end fence and both side fences to match the
paper size.
See page 56 "Loading Paper".
DAC606
Images are printed diagonally to the
pages.
If there are gaps between the paper and the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the bypass
tray, adjust the side or end fences of the paper tray, or the
paper guides of the bypass tray to remove the gaps.
DAC572
419
10. Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems
Checking the Condition of the Machine
If there is a problem with the quality of printing, first check the condition of the machine.
Possible Cause
Solution
There is a problem with the
machine's location.
Make sure that the machine is on a level surface. Place the
machine where it will not be subject to vibration or shock.
Unsupported types of paper is used.
Make sure that the paper being used is supported by the
machine. See page 74 "Supported Paper".
The paper type setting is incorrect.
Make sure that the paper type setting of the printer driver
matches the type of paper loaded. See page 72 "Specifying
Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer Driver".
A non-genuine print cartridge is
being used.
Refilled or non-genuine print cartridge reduces print quality
and can cause malfunctions. Use genuine print cartridge only.
An old print cartridge is being used.
Print cartridge should be opened before their expiration date
and used within six months of being opened.
The machine is dirty.
See page 375 "Maintaining the Machine", and clean the
machine as required.
Humidity level surrounding the
machine may be too low.
Using the machine in a room where humidity level is too low
may cause black lines of a few millimeters thick to appear on
printouts with 75-millimeter spaces in between. In this case, set
[Low Humidity Mode] to [On].
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
For details about how to configure the settings, see
page 256 "System Settings (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
For details about how to configure the settings, see
page 294 "System Settings (When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model)".
420
Print Quality Problems
Checking the Printer Driver Settings
Problem
The printed image is smudged.
Solution
PCL 5e/6
On the printer driver's [Paper] tab, select [Bypass Tray] in
the "Input Tray:" list. In the "Paper Type:" list, select a
proper paper type.
PostScript 3
On the printer driver's [Paper/Quality] tab, select
[Bypass Tray] in the "Paper Source" list. In the "Media"
list, select a proper paper type.
Images smudge when rubbed.
(Toner is not fixed.)
PCL 5e/6
On the printer driver's [Paper] tab, select a proper paper
type in the "Paper Type:" list.
PostScript 3
On the printer driver's [Paper/Quality] tab, select a
proper paper type in the "Media" list.
The printed image is different from
the image on the computer's display.
Only when using PCL 5e/6
When printing graphics, the output
and the screen are different.
To print accurately, specify the printer driver setting to print
without using the graphics command. For details about
specifying the printer driver setting, see the printer driver Help.
Images are cut off, or excess is
printed.
Use the same size paper selected in the application. If you
cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction
function to reduce the image, and then print. For details about
the reduction function, see the printer driver Help.
Photo images are coarse.
Use the application's or printer driver's settings to specify a
higher resolution.
On the printer driver's [Print Quality] tab, select [Raster]
in the "Graphics Mode" list.
For details about the printer driver's settings, see the printer
driver Help.
A solid line is printed as a dashed
line or appears blurred.
Change the dithering settings on the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see the printer driver Help.
421
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Fine lines are fuzzy, of inconsistent
thickness, or do not appear.
Solution
Change the dithering settings on the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see the printer driver Help.
If the problem persists, specify the settings of the application in
which the image was created to change the thickness of the
lines.
422
Printer Problems
Printer Problems
This section describes printing problems and possible solutions.
When You Cannot Print Properly
Problem
An error occurs.
Solution
If an error occurs when printing, change the computer or
printer driver settings.
• Check the printer icon name does not exceed 32
alphanumeric characters. If it does, shorten it.
• Check whether other applications are operating.
Close any other applications, as they may be interfering
with printing. If the problem is not resolved, close
unneeded processes too.
• Check that the latest printer driver is being used.
A print job is canceled.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
If [I/O Timeout] under [System Settings] is set to 15
seconds, increase the time period. A print job may be
canceled if printing is frequently interrupted by data from
other ports, or if printing data is large and takes time for
processing. For details, see page 256 "System Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
If [I/O Timeout] under [System Settings] is set to 15
seconds, increase the time period. A print job may be
canceled if printing is frequently interrupted by data from
other ports, or if printing data is large and takes time for
processing. For details, see page 294 "System Settings
(When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
423
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
A Locked Print file is canceled.
Solution
• The machine already has 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print
data. Print or delete an existing Locked Print file. For
details, see page 102 "Printing Confidential Documents".
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print
files, the machine holds the new Locked Print file for the
period of time specified in [Locked Print] under [System
Settings] before canceling that file. Within this time, you
can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also
print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
For details about [Locked Print], see page 256 "System
Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
For details about [Locked Print], see page 294 "System
Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
There is a considerable delay
between the print start command
and actual printing.
• Processing time depends on data volume. High volume
data, such as graphics-heavy documents, take longer to
be processed.
• To speed up printing, reduce the printing resolution using
the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
• The machine is calibrating color. Wait for a while.
Documents are not printed properly
when using a certain application, or
image data is not printed properly.
Some characters are printed faintly
or not printed.
424
Change the print quality settings.
Printer Problems
Problem
Solution
It takes too long to complete the print
job.
• Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long
time to be processed so simply wait when printing such
data.
• Changing the settings with printer driver may help to
speed up printing.
See the printer driver Help.
• The data is so large or complex that it takes a long time
to be processed.
• If "Processing..." is displayed on the screen, the machine
is receiving data. Wait for a while.
• The printer is adjusting the color registration. Wait for a
while.
A printed image is different from the
image on the computer's display.
• When you use some functions, such as enlargement and
reduction, the layout of the image might be different from
that displayed in the computer display.
• Check that the page layout settings are properly
configured in the application.
• Make sure the paper size selected in the printer
properties dialog box matches the size of the paper
loaded. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Images are cut off, or excess pages
are printed.
If you are using paper whose size is smaller than the paper
size selected in the application, use the same size paper
selected in the application. If you cannot load paper of the
correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image,
and then print.
See the printer driver Help.
425
10. Troubleshooting
When You Cannot Print Clearly
Problem
The whole printout is blurred.
Solution
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has
been stored properly. See page 74 "Supported Paper".
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],
printing is generally less dense.
• The print cartridge is almost empty. If "Replacement
Required: Print Cartridge" appears on the screen, replace
the indicated print cartridge.
• Condensation may have occurred. If rapid change in
temperature or humidity occurs, use this machine only
after it has acclimatized.
Toner smears appear on the print
side of the page.
• The paper setting may not be correct. For example,
although you are using thick paper, the setting for thick
paper may not be specified.
Check the printer driver's paper settings.
See the printer driver Help.
• Check that the paper is not curled or bent. Envelopes can
be curled easily. Flatten out the paper before loading it.
See page 56 "Loading Paper".
Horizontal lines appear on the
printed paper.
• Impact can cause lines to appear on printed paper and
other malfunctions.
Protect the printer from impact at all times, especially
while it is printing.
• If lines appear on prints, turn the printer off, wait a few
moments, and then turn it back on again. Then, perform
the print job again.
Photo images are coarse.
Some applications lower the resolution for making prints.
White spots appear.
The surrounding registration roller or paper tray can become
dirty with paper dust if you use paper other than standard
paper.
Wipe any paper dust off both the paper tray and registration
roller.
426
Printer Problems
Problem
The backs of printed sheets are
blemished.
Solution
• When removing a jammed sheet, the inside of the printer
may have become dirty. Print several sheets until they
come out clean.
• If document size is larger than paper size, e.g. A4
document on B5 paper, the back of the next printed sheet
may become dirty.
The Data In indicator is not flashing
or lit.
If the Data In indicator is not flashing or lit, the data is not
being sent to the printer.
If the printer is connected to the computer using the interface
cable.
Check the port connection setting is correct.
Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
Solid lines are printed as broken
lines.
Only when using PostScript 3
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's
dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
Fine dot patterns do not print.
Only when using PostScript 3
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's
dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
If rubbed with your finger, the print
smears.
The setting of the paper may not be correct. For example,
although thick paper is used, the setting for thick paper may
not be specified.
• Check the paper settings of this printer.
See page 56 "Loading Paper".
• Check the paper settings of the printer driver.
See the printer driver Help.
427
10. Troubleshooting
When Paper Is Not Fed or Ejected Properly
Problem
Solution
Prints fall in front of the machine
when they are output.
Raise the stop fence. For the position of the stop fence, see
page 19 "Guide to Components".
Prints do not stack properly.
The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has been
stored properly. See page 74 "Supported Paper".
The printed paper is curled.
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.
• If the paper curl is severe, retrieve prints from the output
tray more frequently.
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has
been stored properly.
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],
printing is generally less dense.
Printed envelopes come out creased. Check if the fusing unit levers are properly set. Lower the fusing
unit levers.
Other Printing Problems
Problem
The toner has run out and printing
has stopped.
Solution
• When Using the Touch Panel Model
When the "Continue printing?" message appears on the
control panel, pressing [Yes] allows you to print a few
more pages, but the print quality of those pages may be
lower.
• When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
When the "Continue printing?" message appears on the
control panel, pressing the [OK] key allows you to print a
few more pages, but the print quality of those pages may
be lower.
428
Copier Problems
Copier Problems
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies
Problem
The printed copy is blank.
Solution
The original is not placed correctly.
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side
down. When using the ADF, place them copy side up. See
page 89 "Placing Originals".
The wrong original was copied.
If copying from the exposure glass, make sure that there are
no originals in the ADF.
Copied pages do not look the same
as the originals.
Select the correct scan mode according to the type of original.
See page 135 "Specifying Scan Settings for Copying"
Black spots appear when
photocopying a photographic print.
The original may have stuck to the exposure glass due to high
humidity.
Place the original on the exposure glass, and then place two
or three sheets of white paper on top of it. Leave the ADF open
when copying.
A moire pattern is produced.
The original probably has heavily lined or dotted areas.
Switching the setting for image quality between [Photo] and
[Text/Photo] may eliminate the moire pattern.
See page 136 "Selecting the Document Type According to
Original".
The printed copy is dirty.
• Image density is too high.
Adjust the image density. See page 135 "Adjusting
Image Density".
• Toner on the printed surface is not dry.
Do not touch printed surfaces immediately after copying.
Remove freshly printed sheets one by one, taking care
not to touch printed areas.
• The exposure glass or ADF is dirty. See page 375
"Maintaining the Machine".
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.
429
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
When copying from the exposure
glass, the print area of the copy is
out of alignment with the original.
Solution
Place the original copy side down, making sure that it is
aligned to the rear left corner and pressed flat against the
exposure glass.
When You Cannot Make Copies as Wanted
Problem
Photocopied pages are not in
correct order.
Solution
When Using the Touch Panel Model
On the control panel, change the [Sort] setting under copy
settings to collate pages as you require. For details about
[Sort], see page 239 "Copier Features Settings (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)".
When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model
On the control panel, change the [Sort] setting under copy
settings to collate pages as you require. For details about
[Sort], see page 287 "Copier Features Settings (When Using
the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
Copied pages are too dark or too
light.
430
Adjust the image density. See page 135 "Adjusting Image
Density".
Scanner Problems
Scanner Problems
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File
Problem
The following machine settings may
not be correct:
Solution
Check the settings. See page 346 "Configuring the Network
Settings".
• IP address
• Subnet Mask
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected
Problem
Solution
The machine does not start scanning. The ADF or its cover is open. Close the ADF or its cover.
The scanned image is dirty.
• The exposure glass or ADF is dirty. See page 375
"Maintaining the Machine".
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.
The scanned image is distorted or
out of position.
The original was moved during scanning. Do not move the
original during scanning.
The scanned image is upside down.
The original was placed upside down. Place the original in the
correct orientation. See page 89 "Placing Originals".
The scanned image is blank.
The original was placed with the front and back reversed.
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side
down. When using the ADF, place originals copy side up. See
page 89 "Placing Originals".
The scanned image is too dark or
too light.
Adjust the image density. See page 187 "Specifying Scan
Settings for Scanning".
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or
Scan to Folder function does not
work.
Check if a USB flash disk is inserted into the machine. If a USB
flash disk is inserted, scanning functions other than Scan to
USB are not available from the control panel.
431
10. Troubleshooting
Fax Problems (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)
This function is available for SP 330SFN/3710SF only.
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted (When Using
the Touch Panel Model)
Transmission (when using the touch panel model)
Problem
Cannot send files.
432
Causes
Solutions
The telephone line may be
disconnected.
Check if the telephone line is properly
connected to the machine. For details,
see Setup Guide.
The machine cannot accept
a new fax job because there
are 5 unsent faxes in
memory already.
Wait until any of these faxes is
transmitted completely, or use the
[Delete TX Stand.File] function to delete
unnecessary faxes. For details, see
page 247 "Fax Features Settings
(When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
Document appears blank at
the other end.
The original was placed
upside down.
The original was placed upside down.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. See page 89 "Placing
Originals".
Printed or sent images are
spotty.
The exposure glass,
exposure glass cover, or
guide plate of the ADF is
dirty.
Clean them. For details about how to
clean the machine, see page 382
"Cleaning the Exposure Glass". Make
sure ink or correction fluid is dry before
placing originals.
Reception is possible, but
transmission is not.
There are regions and
Contact your sales or service
telephone exchanges where representative.
a dial tone cannot be
detected.
Fax Problems (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Problem
Causes
Solutions
When using On Hook Dial,
"Receiving..." appears and
transmission is not allowed.
If the machine fails to detect
the size of the original when
the [Start] key is pressed, it
performs a receiving
operation.
Press [Scan Size] in [Scan Settings],
select the scan size, and then resend the
document.
LAN-Fax Driver does not
work.
The entered login user
name, login password, or
driver encryption key is
incorrect.
Check your login user name, login
password, or driver encryption key,
and then enter them correctly. For
details, contact your administrator.
Reception (when using the touch panel model)
Problem
Causes
Solutions
Cannot receive files.
The telephone line may be
disconnected.
Check if the telephone line is properly
connected to the machine. For details,
see Setup Guide.
The Receiving File indicator
lights up and the received
document is not printed.
The machine cannot print
because it is out of paper or
toner.
The machine does not print
received fax documents.
[Fax Features] is configured
to store received
documents.
Print the fax documents using Web
browser or the Print Stored RX File
function. For details about printing
received faxes stored in memory,
page 230 "Printing out faxes stored in
memory" and page 338 "Fax Tab
(Only When Using the Touch Panel
Model)".
The machine failed to print
received fax documents.
The paper has run out.
Load paper into the tray.
• Load paper into the tray.
• Add toner.
• The paper tray does not contain
paper of the right size. Load paper
of the right size in the paper tray.
433
10. Troubleshooting
Printing (when using the touch panel model)
Problem
434
Causes
Solutions
Print is slanted.
The paper is fed at a slant.
Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 56
"Loading Paper".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The number sheets loaded
in the paper tray exceeds
the capacity of the machine.
Load paper only as high as the upper
limit markings inside the paper tray.
The paper tray's side fence
is set too tightly.
Pinch the fence lightly, and then adjust
its position.
The paper is too thick or too
thin.
Use the recommended paper. For
details about the recommended paper,
see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Printed paper is being used.
Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
Printed copies are together,
resulting in jams.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
Printed paper is being used.
Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed.
The paper is too thin.
Use the recommended paper. For
details about the recommended paper,
see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Edges of sheets are
creased.
You are using a nonrecommended paper.
Use the recommended paper. For
details about the recommended paper,
see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Black lines appear on the
file printed at the
destination.
The exposure glass,
exposure glass cover, or
guide plate of the ADF is
dirty.
Clean the components. For details
about how to clean the machine, see
page 382 "Cleaning the Exposure
Glass".
Fax Problems (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Problem
The background of received
images appears dirty.
Causes
Image density is too high.
Images from the back of the
page appear.
Received image is too light.
Solutions
Adjust the image density. See
page 187 "Specifying Scan Settings for
Scanning".
When using moist, rough, or Use the recommended paper. For
processed paper, areas of
details about the recommended paper,
print may not be fully
see page 74 "Supported Paper".
reproduced.
The image density has been
specified too low.
Increase the image density. For details
about how to change the density, see
page 188 "Adjusting Image Density".
The original of the
transmitted fax was printed
on paper that is too thin.
Ask the sender to reprint the original on
thicker paper, and then fax it again.
When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-mail (When Using the Touch Panel
Model)
When a report is printed from the machine (when using the touch panel model)
Error Report
An Error Report is printed if a document cannot be successfully sent or received.
Possible causes include a problem with the machine or noise on the telephone line. If an error
occurs during transmission, resend the original. If an error occurs during reception, ask the sender
to resend the document.
• If an error happens frequently, contact your service representative.
• The "Page" column gives the total number of pages.
Power Failure Report
• Right after recovery from power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged
to guard against future data loss. Keep the machine plugged in and the power on for about
24 hours after the power loss.
Even if the power is turned off, the contents of the machine memory (for example, programmed
numbers) will not be lost. Lost items will include any fax documents stored in memory using Memory
Transmission or Reception.
435
10. Troubleshooting
If a file deleted from memory, Power Failure Report is automatically printed as soon as the power is
restored.
This report can be used to identify lost files. If a document stored for Memory Transmission was lost,
resend it. If a document received by Memory Reception was lost, ask the sender to resend it.
Error Report (E-mail)
The Error Report (E-mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send an Error notification
Email.
For details about the Error notification Email, see page 436 "When an error notification E-mail is
received (when using the touch panel model)".
Transmission Error Report
The Transmission Error Report is printed by the machine when it is unable to send a Transmission
Error Mail Notification. For details about the Transmission Error Mail Notification, see page 436
"When an error notification E-mail is received (when using the touch panel model)".
When an error notification E-mail is received (when using the touch panel model)
Server-generated error e-mail
The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of an e-mail that has failed to be
transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incorrect e-mail address).
• If an Internet Fax transmission bypasses the SMTP server, even if transmission is not successful,
an error e-mail is not sent from the server.
• After a server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent document is printed.
Transmission Error Mail Notification
If an e-mail fails to be sent due to a transmission error, the machine sends the Transmission Error
Mail Notification to the sender. If an e-mail could not be sent using the forward function, the
Transmission Error Mail Notification will be sent to the destination e-mail address for forwarding.
If there is an additional user-registered e-mail address or administrator e-mail address, the
Transmission Error Mail Notification will be sent to that address.
• If Transmission Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, Transmission Error Report is printed by
the machine.
Error Code (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
The table below describes the meaning of error codes that appear under "Results" on Fax Journal or
transmission status report, and what to do when a particular error code appears.
"X" indicates a number in an error code that appear differently depending on the situation.
436
Fax Problems (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Error Code
1XXX11
Solution
An original has been jammed inside the ADF while sending a
fax in Immediate Transmission mode.
• Remove jammed originals, and then place them again.
See page 417 "Paper Feed Problems".
• Check the originals are suitable for scanning. See
page 89 "Placing Originals".
1XXX21
The line could not be connected correctly.
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the
machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone company.
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
1XXX22 to 1XXX23
Dial fails when trying to send faxes.
• Check if that the fax number you dialed is correct.
• Check if that the destination is a fax machine.
• Check if that the line is not busy.
• You may need to insert a pause between dial digits. Press
[Redial] after, for example, the area code.
• Check if [PSTN / PBX] under [Administrator Tools] has
been specified properly for your connection method to
the telephone network. See page 271 "Administrator
Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
1XXX32 to 1XXX84
An error occurred while sending a fax.
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the
machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone company.
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
437
10. Troubleshooting
Error Code
2XXX14
Solution
The machine was not able to print the received fax, or the
machine's memory reached its capacity while receiving a fax
because the document was too large.
• The paper tray was empty. Load paper in the paper tray.
See page 56 "Loading Paper".
• The tray selected in [Select Paper Tray] under [Fax
Features] did not contain A4, Letter, or Legal size paper.
Load valid size paper in the tray, and configure the
paper size settings under [Paper Settings] accordingly.
• A cover or tray was open. Close the cover or tray.
• There was a paper jam. Remove the jammed paper. See
page 404 "Removing Paper Jams".
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace the print cartridge.
See page 375 "Replacing the Print Cartridge".
• The received fax was too large. Ask the sender to re-send
the document in parts as several smaller faxes, or to send
the fax at a lower resolution.
2XXX32 to 2XXX84
An error occurred while receiving a fax.
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the
machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone company.
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
438
Common Problems
Common Problems
This section describes how to troubleshoot common problems that may occur while operating the
machine.
Problem
The machine does not turn on.
Possible cause
The power cord is not
connected properly.
Solution
• Make sure that the power
plug is firmly inserted into
the wall outlet.
• Make sure that the wall
outlet is not defective by
connecting another
working device.
An error message is shown on
the machine's screen.
An error has occurred.
See page 387 "Error and Status
Messages on the Screen".
The Alert indicator is lit or
flashing.
An error has occurred.
See page 401 "Panel
Indicator".
Pages do not print.
The machine is warming up or
receiving data.
Wait until "Printing..." appears
on the screen. If "Processing..."
is displayed on the screen, the
machine is receiving data.
Pages are not printed.
The interface cable is not
connected correctly.
Strange noise is heard.
The supplies are not properly
installed.
• Reconnect the cable.
• Check that the interface
cable is the correct type.
Confirm that the supplies are
properly installed.
439
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
The volume of the sounds
produced by the machine is too
loud.
Possible cause
The volume is set to the high
level.
Solution
• When Using the Touch
Panel Model
Adjust the volume of the
beep, ring, speaker, and
alarm sounds. For details,
see page 256 "System
Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model
Adjust the volume of the
beep, ring, speaker, and
alarm sounds. For details,
see page 294 "System
Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
The volume of the sounds
produced by the machine is too
quiet.
The volume is muted or set to the
low level.
• When Using the Touch
Panel Model
Adjust the volume of the
beep, ring, speaker, and
alarm sounds. For details,
see page 256 "System
Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• When Using the Four-line
LCD Panel Model
Adjust the volume of the
beep, ring, speaker, and
alarm sounds. For details,
see page 294 "System
Settings (When Using the
Four-line LCD Panel
Model)".
The network setting may not
have been configured properly.
440
Using Web Image Monitor,
check the setting and check
whether printing can be
performed.
If the problem persists, contact
your service representative.
Common Problems
Problem
Cannot connect to wireless
LAN.
Possible cause
A wireless LAN option is not
installed on the machine.
Solution
Wi-Fi Direct connection and
wireless LAN connection are
enabled if a wireless LAN
option is installed on the
machine.
Turn off the machine, and insert
a wireless LAN option into the
USB port for the wireless LAN
option.
For the name of the optional
equipment, see page 14 "How
to Read This Manual". For the
position of the USB port, see
page 19 "Guide to
Components".
• If any of these problems persist, turn off the power, pull out the power cord, and contact your sales
or service representative.
441
10. Troubleshooting
442
11. Configuring Network Settings
Using OS X
This chapter describes how to connect the machine to the network and specify the network settings using
OS X.
Configurations differ according to the communication environment of your system.
Installing the Printer Driver
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
3. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
4. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
5. Double-click the package file icon.
6. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
7. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
443
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Installing Smart Organizing Monitor
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
3. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
4. Double-click the [Utility] folder.
5. Double-click the package file icon.
6. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
7. If the [Printer Driver Selection] dialog box appears, do one of the following:
• Select the machine's model.
• Enter the IP address of the machine manually.
• Click [Search Network Printer] to search the machine via the network.
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
444
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
Using a USB Cable
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable.
3. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
4. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
6. Double-click the package file icon.
7. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
8. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
9. Start System Preferences.
10. Click [Printers & Scanners].
Check that the machine automatically recognized by plug-and-play appears in the printers list.
11. Click the [+] button.
If [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
12. Click [Default].
13. Select the printer that has "USB" indicated in the [Kind] column.
14. Select the printer you are using from the [Use:] pop-up menu.
15. Click [Add].
16. Select [Installed] or [Not Installed] for [Tray 2], and then click [OK].
17. Quit System Preferences.
Setup is completed.
Using an Ethernet Cable
From Step 18, perform operations on the machine.
When using the touch panel model
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Connect the machine and the computer with an Ethernet cable.
445
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
3. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
4. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
6. Double-click the package file icon.
7. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
8. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
9. Start System Preferences.
10. Click [Printers & Scanners].
11. Click the [+] button.
If [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
12. Click [Default].
13. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network
environment (TCP/IP, etc.).
14. Select the printer you are using from the [Use:] pop-up menu.
15. Click [Add].
16. Select [Installed] or [Not Installed] for [Tray 2], and then click [OK].
17. Quit System Preferences.
18. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
19. Press [Network Settings].
20. Press [IPV4 Configuration].
21. Press [IPV4 DHCP].
22. Select [Active] to automatically obtain the IP address or [Inactive] to specify the IP
address manually.
If you have selected [Active], proceed to Step 26.
23. Enter the machine's IPv4 address in [IP Address].
24. Enter the subnet mask in [Subnet Mask].
25. Enter the gateway address in [Gateway Address].
26. Press [OK].
27. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
Setup is completed.
446
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Connect the machine and the computer with an Ethernet cable.
3. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
4. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
6. Double-click the package file icon.
7. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
8. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
9. Start System Preferences.
10. Click [Printers & Scanners].
11. Click the [+] button.
If [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
12. Click [Default].
13. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network
environment (TCP/IP, etc.).
14. Select the printer you are using from the [Use:] pop-up menu.
15. Click [Add].
16. Select [Installed] or [Not Installed] for [Tray 2], and then click [OK].
17. Quit System Preferences.
18. Press the [User Tools] key.
19. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
20. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPv4 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.
21. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.
22. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active] to automatically obtain the IP address or
[Inactive] to specify the IP address manually.
If you have selected [Active], proceed to Step 28.
23. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IP Address], and then press the [OK] key.
24. Enter the machine's IPv4 address, and then press the [OK] key.
25. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Subnet Mask], and then press the [OK] key.
26. Enter the subnet mask, and then press the [OK] key.
447
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
27. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Gateway Address], and then press the [OK] key.
28. Enter the gateway address, and then press the [OK] key.
29. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
Setup is completed.
448
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
• To use wireless network, the wireless LAN option needs to be installed to the machine.
There are four methods for connecting the machine to a wireless network:
• Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
See page 449 "Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard".
• Using the WPS button
See page 451 "Using the WPS Button".
• Using a PIN code
See page 453 "Using a PIN Code".
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
A router (access point) is needed to set up a connection.
Checking the SSID and encryption key
The SSID and Encryption key for the router (access point) may be printed on a label affixed to the
router (access point). For details about the SSID and Encryption key, refer to the router (access
point) manual.
Configuring settings using the control panel
Before doing the following procedure, install the printer driver according to the procedure on
page 443 "Installing the Printer Driver".
Make sure the Ethernet cable is not connected to the machine.
When using the touch panel model
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Make sure the wireless LAN option is attached to the machine and the wireless (WiFi) connection is enabled.
449
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
3. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
4. Press the Wireless (Wi-Fi) icon on the [Home] screen.
5. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Administrator Tools] menu.
6. Press [Network Wizard].
7. Press [Wireless (Wi-Fi)].
8. Press the SSID of the router (access point) from the searched SSID list.
9. Enter the encryption key using the number keys, and then press the [Connect].
As the passphrase, you can enter either 8 to 63 ASCII characters (0x20-0x7e) or 64
hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f).
10. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
"Connected to access point." is displayed.
• Connection has failed:
"Failed to connect to access point." is displayed.
Check the configuration for the router (access point), and then try the connection again.
11. Press [OK].
12. Press [Exit].
13. Select to display [Network Wizard] menu or not when you turn on the machine
14. Configuring the Wireless (Wi-Fi) settings is complete.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
450
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
2. Make sure the wireless LAN option is attached to the machine and the wireless (WiFi) connection is enabled.
3. Press the [User Tools] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Wizard], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wireless (Wi-Fi)], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select SSID of the router (access point) from the searched
SSID list, and then press the [OK] key.
7. Enter the encryption key using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
As the passphrase, you can enter either 8 to 63 ASCII characters (0x20-0x7e) or 64
hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f).
8. Press the [OK] key.
After connecting to the network, the menu screen is displayed.
9. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
"Connect succeed!" is displayed.
• Connection has failed:
"Connect failed!" is displayed.
Check the configuration for the router (access point), and then try the connection again.
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Quit Setup], and then press the [OK] key.
11. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select to display [Network Wizard] menu or not when you
turn on the machine, then press the [OK] key.
12. Configuring the Wireless (Wi-Fi) settings is complete.
Using the WPS Button
A router (access point) is needed to set up a connection.
Before doing the following procedure, install the printer driver according to the procedure on page 443
"Installing the Printer Driver".
Make sure the Ethernet cable is not connected to the machine.
When using the touch panel model
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Make sure the wireless LAN option is attached to the machine and the wireless (WiFi) connection is enabled.
451
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
3. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
4. Press the Wireless (Wi-Fi) icon on the [Home] screen.
5. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Administrator Tools] menu.
6. Press [Wireless (Wi-Fi) Sett.].
7. Press [WPS].
8. Press [PBC].
9. Press [Connect].
"Please wait for 2 minutes" appears, and the machine starts to connect in PBC method.
10. Press the WPS button on the router (access point) within two minutes.
For details about how to use the WPS button, refer to the manuals for the router (access point).
11. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
"Connected to access point." is displayed.
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 8, and then press the [Home] key to
return to the initial screen.
Configuring the Wi-Fi settings is complete.
• Connection has failed:
"Failed to connect to access point." is displayed.
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 8. Check the configuration for the
router (access point), then try the connection again.
12. Configuring the Wireless (Wi-Fi) settings is complete.
452
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Make sure the wireless LAN option is attached to the machine and the wireless (WiFi) connection is enabled.
3. Press the [User Tools] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
5. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press the [OK] key.
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Admin. Tools] menu.
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wireless (Wi-Fi)], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [WPS], and then press the [OK] key.
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [PBC], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press [Yes].
10. Press the WPS button on the router (access point) within two minutes.
For details about how to use the WPS button, refer to the manuals for the router (access point).
11. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
"Connection to AP has Succeeded" is displayed.
Press [EXIT] to return to the screen displayed in Step 8, and then press the [User Tools]
key to return to the initial screen.
• Connection has failed:
"Connection to AP has Failed" is displayed.
Press the [EXIT] to return to the screen displayed in Step 8.
Check the configuration for the router (access point), then try the connection again.
12. Configuring the Wireless (Wi-Fi) settings is complete.
Using a PIN Code
A router (access point) is needed to set up a connection. To establish a connection using the PIN code,
use a computer that is connected to the router (access point).
Before doing the following procedure, install the printer driver according to the procedure on page 443
"Installing the Printer Driver".
Make sure the Ethernet cable is not connected to the machine.
453
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
When using the touch panel model
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Open the PIN code configuration window (web page) for the router (access point) on
your computer.
3. Make sure the wireless LAN option is attached to the machine and the wireless (WiFi) connection is enabled.
4. Press the [Home] key.
DYG322
5. Press the Wireless (Wi-Fi) icon on the [Home] screen.
6. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Administrator Tools] menu.
7. Press [Wireless (Wi-Fi) Sett.].
8. Press [WPS].
9. Press [PIN].
10. Check the PIN code.
Write down the PIN code in case you might forget it.
11. Enter the machine’s PIN code (8 digits) on the router (access point)’s web page. (The
web page accessed in Step 2)
12. Execute WPS (PIN system) from the router (access point)’s web page.
13. Press [Connect] on the control panel.
"Please wait for 2 minutes" and connecting with PIN method starts.
14. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
"Connected to access point." is displayed.
454
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 9, and then press the [Home] key to
return to the initial screen.
• Connection has failed:
"Failed to connect to access point." is displayed.
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 9. Check the configuration for the
router (access point), then try the connection again.
15. Configuring the Wi-Fi settings is complete.
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Open the PIN code configuration window (web page) for the router (access point) on
your computer.
3. Make sure the wireless LAN option is attached to the machine and the wireless (WiFi) connection is enabled.
4. Press the [User Tools] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
6. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press the [OK] key.
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Admin. Tools] menu.
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wireless (Wi-Fi)], and then press the [OK] key.
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [WPS], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [PIN], and then press the [OK] key.
10. Check the PIN code.
Write down the PIN code in case you might forget it.
11. Enter the machine’s PIN code (8 digits) on the router (access point)’s web page (The
web page accessed in Step 2).
12. Execute WPS (PIN system) from the router (access point)’s web page.
13. Press [Connect].
14. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
"Connection to AP has Succeeded" is displayed.
Press [EXIT] to return to the screen displayed in Step 9, and then press the [User Tools]
key to return to the initial screen.
• Connection has failed:
455
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
"Connection to AP has Failed" is displayed.
Press the [Exit] key to return to the screen displayed in Step 9. Check the configuration
for the router (access point), then try the connection again.
15. Configuring the Wireless (Wi-Fi) settings is complete.
456
12. Appendix
This chapter describes the machine specifications and consumables.
Transmission Using IPsec
For securer communications, this machine supports the IPsec protocol. When applied, IPsec encrypts
data packets at the network layer using shared key encryption. The machine uses encryption key
exchange to create a shared key for both sender and receiver. To achieve even higher security, you can
also renew the shared key on a validity period basis.
• IPsec is not applied to data obtained through DHCP or DNS.
• IPsec compatible operating systems are Windows 7 or later, Windows Server 2008 or later, OS X
10.9 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 or later. However, some setting items are not supported
depending on the operating system. Make sure the IPsec settings you specify are consistent with the
operating system's IPsec settings.
• When using the touch panel model
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec
under [Administrator Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec
under [Admin. Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• For details about specifying the IPsec settings using Web Image Monitor, see page 358
"Configuring the IPsec Settings".
• When using the touch panel model
• For details about enabling and disabling IPsec using the control panel, see page 271
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• For details about enabling and disabling IPsec using the control panel, see page 310
"Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec
IPsec consists of two main functions: the encryption function, which ensures the confidentiality of data,
and the authentication function, which verifies the sender of the data and the data's integrity. This
machine's IPsec function supports two security protocols: the ESP protocol, which enables both of the
IPsec functions at the same time, and the AH protocol, which enables only the authentication function.
457
12. Appendix
ESP Protocol
The ESP protocol provides secure transmission through both encryption and authentication. This
protocol does not provide header authentication.
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified
automatically.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
AH Protocol
The AH protocol provides secure transmission through authentication of packets only, including
headers.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
AH Protocol + ESP Protocol
When combined, the ESP and AH protocols provide secure transmission through both encryption
and authentication. These protocols provide header authentication.
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified
automatically.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
• Some operating systems use the term "Compliance" in place of "Authentication".
Security Association
This machine uses encryption key exchange as the key setting method. With this method, agreements
such as the IPsec algorithm and key must be specified for both sender and receiver. Such agreements
form what is known as an SA (Security Association). IPsec communication is possible only if the
receiver's and sender's SA settings are identical.
The SA settings are auto configured on both parties' machines. However, before the IPsec SA can be
established, the ISAKMP SA (Phase 1) settings must be auto configured. When this is done, the IPsec SA
(Phase 2) settings, which allow actual IPsec transmission, will be auto configured.
Also, for further security, the SA can be periodically auto updated by applying a validity period (time
limit) for its settings. This machine only supports IKEv1 for encryption key exchange.
458
Transmission Using IPsec
Multiple settings can be configured in the SA.
Settings 1-10
You can configure ten separate sets of SA details (such as different shared keys and IPsec
algorithms).
IPsec policies are searched through one by one, starting at [No.1].
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow
This section explains the procedure for specifying encryption key exchange settings.
Machine
PC
1. Set the IPsec settings on Web Image Monitor.
1. Set the same IPsec settings as the machine on
PC.
2. Enable IPsec settings.
2. Enable IPsec settings.
3. Confirm IPsec transmission.
• After configuring IPsec, you can use "ping" command to check if the connection is established
correctly. Because the response is slow during initial key exchange, it may take some time to
confirm that transmission has been established.
• When using the touch panel model
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec
under [Administrator Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec
under [Admin. Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• When using the touch panel model
• For details about disabling IPsec using the control panel, see page 271 "Administrator Tools
Settings (When Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• For details about disabling IPsec using the control panel, seepage 310 "Administrator Tools
Settings (When Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
459
12. Appendix
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [IPsec Settings].
3. Click the [IPsec Policy List] tab.
4. Select the number of the setting you want to modify in the list, and then click [Change].
5. Modify the IPsec related settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].
7. Click the [IPsec Global Settings] tab, and then select [Active] in [IPsec Function].
8. If necessary, specify [Default Policy], [Broadcast and Multicast Bypass], and [All ICMP
Bypass] also.
9. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].
• An administrator password can be specified in the [Administrator] tab.
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer
Specify exactly the same settings for IPsec SA settings on your computer as are specified for the IPsec
Settings on the machine. Setting methods differ according to the computer's operating system. The
following procedure is based on Windows 10 in an IPv4 environment as an example.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then click
[Administrative Tools].
2. Double-click [Local Security Policy], and then click [IP Security Policies on Local
Computer].
3. In the "Action" menu, click [Create IP Security Policy...].
The IP Security Policy Wizard appears.
4. Click [Next].
5. Enter a security policy name in "Name", and then click [Next].
6. Clear the "Activate the default response rule" check box, and then click [Next].
7. Select "Edit properties", and then click [Finish].
8. In the "General" tab, click [Settings...].
460
Transmission Using IPsec
9. In "Authenticate and generate a new key after every", enter the same validity period (in
minutes) that is specified on the machine in [IKE Life Time], and then click [Methods...].
10. Confirm that the Encryption Algorithm ("Encryption"), Hash Algorithm ("Integrity"), and
IKE Diffie-Hellman Group ("Diffie-Hellman Group") settings in "Security method
preference order" all match those specified on the machine in [IKE Settings].
If the settings are not displayed, click [Add...].
11. Click [OK] twice.
12. Click [Add...] in the "Rules" tab.
The Security Rule Wizard appears.
13. Click [Next].
14. Select "This rule does not specify a tunnel", and then click [Next].
15. Select the type of network for IPsec, and then click [Next].
16. Click [Add...] in the IP Filter List.
17. In [Name], enter an IP Filter name, and then click [Add...].
The IP Filter Wizard appears.
18. Click [Next].
19. In [Description:], enter a name or a detailed explanation of the IP filter, and then click
[Next].
You may click [Next] and proceed to the next step without entering any information in this field.
20. Select "My IP Address" in "Source address", and then click [Next].
21. Select "A specific IP Address or Subnet" in "Destination address", enter the machine's IP
address, and then click [Next].
22. For the IPsec protocol type, select "Any", and then click [Next].
23. Click [Finish], and then click [OK].
24. Select the IP filter that you have just created, and then click [Next].
25. Click [Add...] in the Filter Action.
The Filter Action Wizard appears.
26. Click [Next].
27. In [Name], enter a Filter Action name, and then click [Next].
28. Select "Negotiate security", and then click [Next].
29. Select "Allow unsecured communication if a secure connection cannot be established.",
and then click [Next].
30. Select "Custom" and click [Settings].
31. In "Integrity algorithm", select the authentication algorithm that was specified on the
machine.
461
12. Appendix
32. In "Encryption algorithm", select the encryption algorithm that specified on the machine.
33. In "Session key settings", select "Generate a new key every", and enter the validity
period (in seconds) that was specified on the machine.
34. Click [OK].
35. Click [Next].
36. Click [Finish].
37. Select the filter action that you have just created, and then click [Next].
38. Select one of options for an authentication method, and then click [Next].
39. Click [Finish], and then click [OK].
The new IP security policy (IPsec settings) is specified.
40. Click [IP Security Policies on Local Computer].
41. Select the security policy that you have just created, right click on it, and then click
[Assign].
IPsec settings on the computer are enabled.
• To disable the computer's IPsec settings, select the security policy, right click, and then click [Unassign].
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel
• [IPsec] is displayed when a password is set in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• When using the touch panel model
• For details about [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• For details about [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 310 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
When using the touch panel model
1. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
2. Press [Administrator Tools].
3. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
4. Press [ ] twice.
5. Press [IPsec].
462
Transmission Using IPsec
6. Press [Active] or [Inactive].
When using the four-line LCD panel model
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [IPsec], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active] or [Inactive] and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• A password for accessing the [Administrator Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• When using the touch panel model
• For details about [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Touch Panel Model)".
• You can press [Exit] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• For details about [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 310 "Administrator Tools Settings (When
Using the Four-line LCD Panel Model)".
463
12. Appendix
Notes About the Toner
• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any third-party toner is used.
• Depending on printing conditions, there are cases where the printer cannot print the number of
sheets indicated in the specifications.
• Replace the print cartridge if the printed image suddenly becomes pale or blurred.
• When operating the machine for the first time, use the print cartridge supplied with this machine. If
this cartridge is not initially used, the following problems may occur:
• When using the touch panel model
• "Replace Required Soon: Print Cartr." Toner Cartridge (XX) will be displayed before the
toner runs out.
• "Replacement Required: Toner(Black)" Toner Cartridge (XX) will be displayed when the
toner runs out, but instead the printed image suddenly becomes pale or blurred.
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• "Replace Required Soon:" will be displayed before the toner runs out.
• "Replacement Required:" will be displayed when the toner runs out, but instead the
printed image suddenly becomes pale or blurred.
• When using the touch panel model
• The lifetime of the photo conductor, which is built into the print cartridge, is taken into account
in displaying "Replace Required Soon: Print Cartr." Toner Cartridge (XX). If the photo
conductor stops working before the toner runs out, "Replace Required Soon: Print Cartr."
Toner Cartridge (XX) may be displayed.
• When using the four-line LCD panel model
• The lifetime of the photo conductor, which is built into the print cartridge, is taken into account
in displaying "Replace Required Soon:". If the photo conductor stops working before the toner
runs out, "Replace Required Soon:" may be displayed.
464
Specifications of the Machine
Specifications of the Machine
This section lists the machine's specifications.
• We have obtained each author's permission for the use of applications including open-source
software applications. For details about the copyright information for these software applications,
see "OSS.pdf" on the CD-ROM supplied with the machine.
General Function Specifications
Item
Description
Configuration
Desktop
Print process
Laser electrostatic transfer
Maximum paper size for scanning
using the exposure glass
A4, Letter (81/2 × 11 inches)
Maximum paper size for scanning
using the ADF
Legal (81/2 × 14 inches)
Maximum paper size for printing
Legal (81/2 × 14 inches)
Warm-up time (23 °C, 71.6 °F)
30 seconds or less
Paper sizes
For details, see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Paper type
For details, see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Paper output capacity (80 g/m2, 20
lb)
50 sheets
Paper input capacity (80 g/m2, 20
lb)
• Tray 1
250 sheets
• Bypass tray
50 sheets
ADF capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
35 sheets
Memory
256 MB
465
12. Appendix
Item
Description
Power requirements
220-240 V, 4 A, 50/60 Hz
120-127 V, 7.7 A, 60Hz
Power consumption
The power level when the main switch
is turned off and the power cord is
plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less
• SP 330SFN/3710SF
• Maximum
960 W
• Ready
69.4 W
• During printing
520 W
• SP 330SN
• Maximum
960 W
• Ready
68.6 W
• During printing
514 W
Power consumption
The power level when the main switch
is turned off and the power cord is
plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less
• Maximum
960 W
• Ready
65.7 W
• During printing
527 W
Noise emission
• Sound power level
Stand-by: 30.0 dB (A)
During printing: 67.0 dB (A)
• Sound pressure level
Stand-by: 21.5 dB (A)
During printing: 57.0 dB (A)
466
Specifications of the Machine
Item
Machine dimensions (Width × Depth ×
Height)
Description
• SP 330SN
405 × 392 × 407 mm (15.9 ×15.4 × 16.0 inches)
• SP 330SFN/SP 3710SF
405 × 392 × 420 mm (15.9 ×15.4 × 16.5 inches)
Weight (machine body with
consumables)
18 kg (40 lb.) or less
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO
7779.
• Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the bystander.
Printer Function Specifications
Item
Description
Printing speed
32 pages per minute (A4), 34 pages per minute (Letter)
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi (maximum: 1200 × 1200 dpi)
First print speed
7.5 seconds or less
Interface
• Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX)
• USB 2.0
• USB2.0 Host
Printer language
PCL6, PCL5e, PostScript3
Fonts (PCL6, PCL5e, PostScript3)
80 fonts
467
12. Appendix
Copier Function Specifications
Item
Maximum resolution (scanning and printing)
Description
• Exposure glass
Scanning: 600 × 600 dpi
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi
• ADF
Scanning: 300 × 600 dpi
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi
First copy speed (A4, at 23 °C, 71.6 °F)
13 seconds
Multiple copy speed
32 pages per minute
Reproduction ratio
• Fixed ratio
25%, 50%, 61%, 71%, 82%, 87%, 93%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
25%, 50%, 65%, 73%, 78%, 85%, 93%,
121%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
• Zoom ratio
25% to 400%
Copy quantity
99
Scanner Function Specifications
Item
Maximum scanning area (horizontal × vertical)
Description
• Exposure glass
216 × 297 mm (8.5 × 11.7 inches)
• ADF
216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14 inches)
468
Specifications of the Machine
Item
Maximum resolution when scanning from the
control panel (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan
to Folder, Scan to USB)
Description
• Exposure glass
600 × 600 dpi
• ADF
300 × 300 dpi
Maximum resolution when scanning from a
computer (TWAIN)
• Exposure glass
19200 × 19200 dpi
• ADF
600 × 600 dpi
Maximum resolution when scanning from a
computer (WIA)
Gradation
600 × 600 dpi
• Input: 16 bit color processing
• Output: 8 bit color processing
Scanning time
• Black and white: 10 seconds or less
• Color: 20 seconds or less (A4/600 dpi/
Compressed)
Not including transfer time.
ADF throughput
• Black and white: 13 image per minute
• Full Color: 4 image per minute
Interface
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), USB 2.0
Sendable file formats
TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Address book
Maximum 100 items
Number of redials: 1
Fax Function Specifications (When Using the Touch Panel Model)
Item
Access line
Description
• Public switched telephone networks (PSTN)
• Private branch exchange (PBX)
Transmission mode
ITU-T Group 3 (G3)
469
12. Appendix
Item
Description
Scan line density
• 8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 ×
100 dpi)
• 8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 ×
200 dpi)
Transmission time
3 seconds (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm,
33.6 kbps, MMR, ITU-T # 1 chart)
Transfer rate
33.6 kbps to 2400 bps (auto shift down system)
Data compression methods
MH, MR, MMR
Memory capacity
100 sheets (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm,
MMR, ITU-T # 1 chart)
Address book
• Speed dial
100 items
• Quick dial
8 items
• Number of redials for Fax
1
Paper Feed Unit PB1130
Paper capacity
250 sheets
Paper size
For details, see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Dimensions (Width × Depth × Height)
370 × 392 × 89 mm (14.6 × 15.4 × 3.5 inches)
Paper weight
For details, see page 74 "Supported Paper".
Weight
Less than 3 kg (6.6 lb.)
470
Consumables
Consumables
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we
recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
Print Cartridge
Print cartridge
Black
Average printable number of pages per cartridge *1
3,500 or 7,000 pages
*1 The printable number of pages is based on pages that are compliant with ISO/IEC 19798 and the image
density set as the factory default. ISO/IEC 19798 is an international standard on measurement of printable
pages, set by the International Organization for Standardization.
• For information about consumables, see our website.
• If print cartridges are not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. For easy
replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra print cartridges.
• The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number
of pages printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity.
• Print cartridges may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to deterioration over
the period of use.
• Print cartridges (consumables) are not covered by warranty. However, if there is a problem,
contact the store where they were purchased.
• When you first use this machine, use the print cartridges packaged with the machine.
• The supplied print cartridges are good for approximately 1,000 pages (SP 330SN/SP 330SFN),
or 7,000 pages (SP 3710SF).
• This machine routinely performs cleaning and uses toner during this operation to maintain quality.
• To prevent a cleaning malfunction, you may need to replace a print cartridge even if it is not empty.
471
12. Appendix
Information for This Machine
User Information on Electrical & Electronic Equipment
Europe and Asia)
(mainly
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
All Other Users
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
For Users in India
This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the "India E-waste
Rule" and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or
polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for
cadmium, except for the exemptions set in the Rule.
472
Information for This Machine
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Environmental Advice for Users
(mainly Europe)
Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway
Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.
https://www.ricoh-return.com/
473
12. Appendix
Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.
Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.
Notice To NFC Users
(mainly Europe)
Declaration of Conformity
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL: http://www.ricoh.com/products/
ce_doc2/
and selecting the product applicable.
NFC
Operating frequency: 13.56 MHz
Maximum radio-frequency power: less than 42 dBµA/m (at 10m)
* Maximum radio-frequency power is depended on power value of reader/writer device
NOTES TO USERS REGARDING FACSIMILE UNIT (NEW ZEALAND)
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted
that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement
of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance
that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a
different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
474
Information for This Machine
This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds
for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such
circumstances.
Devices connected to the telephone port may lose their memory if this fax machine is on line for
extended periods. To prevent this, such devices should have the facility for battery or similar backup of
memory.
This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the same
line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other
Telecom customers.
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the auxiliary telephone port. The auxiliary telephone
port is not specifically designed for 3-wire connected equipment that may not respond to incoming
ringing when attached to this port.
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
Notes to users in the United States of America
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
475
12. Appendix
Certification
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Part 68 of the FCC Rules regarding Facsimile Unit
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. On
the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in
the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone
company.
2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
detail.
4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the
local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted
service.
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer Support Department at 1-888-456-6457. If this device is causing
problems with your telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect
the equipment until the problem is resolved.
476
Information for This Machine
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), see
the manual provided with this machine for instruction on resolving the problem.
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission,
public service commission or corporation commission for information.
10. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about
what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other
number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following steps:
Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming chapter of the operating
instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or business. This
information is transmitted with your document by the FAX HEADER feature. In addition to the information,
be sure to program the date and time into your machine.
Notes to Canadian Users regarding Facsimile Unit
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five.
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens
Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une
477
12. Appendix
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme des IES de tous les dispositifs
n'excède pas cinq.
ENERGY STAR Program
ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment
The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multifunction
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.
Saving Energy
This machine is equipped with the following Energy Saver modes: Energy Saver mode 1 and Energy
Saver mode 2. If the machine has been idle for a certain period of time, the machine automatically
enters Energy Saver mode.
The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax, or
when any key is pressed.
Energy Saver mode 1
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if the machine has been idle for about 30 seconds. It
takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off state or Energy Saver
mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.
478
Information for This Machine
Energy Saver mode 2
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2 after the period of time specified for this setting is
passed. Power consumption is lower in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver mode 1, but it
takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver mode 1.
Specifications
Energy Saver mode 1
Power Consumption*1
• SP 330SFN/SP 3710SF
47.6 W
• SP 330SN
46.9 W
44.4 W
Default Time
30 seconds
Recovery Time*1
• SP 330SFN/SP 3710SF
7.97 seconds
• SP 330SN
7.83 seconds
7.93 seconds
479
12. Appendix
Energy Saver mode 2
Power Consumption*1
• SP 330SFN/SP 3710SF
0.928 W
• SP 330SN
0.715 W
0.871 W
Default Time
30 seconds
Recovery Time*1
• SP 330SFN/SP 3710SF
10.71 seconds
• SP 330SN
10.11 seconds
10.41 seconds
Duplex Function*2
Standard
*1 Recovery time and power consumption may differ depending on the conditions and environment of the
machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used with) a
duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
For details about Energy Saver modes, see page 271 "Administrator Tools Settings (When Using the
Touch Panel Model)".
• You cannot use NFC or the USB port in Energy Saver mode. Push any key to recover from Energy
Saver mode.
480
Trademarks
Trademarks
Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
OS X, TrueType, App Store, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Firefox® is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under
license.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
LINUX® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Windows Vista®, and Internet Explorer® are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Mopria and the Mopria logo are trademarks of Mopria Alliance, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
The proper name of Internet Explorer 6 is Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
481
12. Appendix
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 for Itanium-based Systems
Microsoft® Windows® Web Server 2008
Microsoft® Windows® HPC Server 2008
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 for Itanium-based Systems
Microsoft® Windows® Web Server R2 2008
Microsoft® Windows® HPC Server R2 2008
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
482
Trademarks
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Datacenter
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Datacenter
• The product names of Windows Server 2016 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Essentials
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
483
12. Appendix
484
INDEX
@Remote..................................................... 286, 324
A
Address book..............................................142, 255
address book (LAN-Fax)........................... 219, 222
ADF.......................................................................383
ADF (Auto Document Feeder)..................... 91, 383
Administrator password.............. 16, 271, 310, 363
Administrator settings.......................................... 363
Administrator Tools settings....................... 271, 310
Attaching Paper Feed Unit TK1220.................... 26
Authentication...................................................... 457
Authorized reception.......................................... 232
Auto e-mail notification settings......................... 349
B
Backup settings.................................................... 364
Basic operation........................................... 150, 235
Broadcast function.............................................. 210
Bypass tray.............................................................60
Bypass Tray......................................................... 336
Bypass tray setting priority................................. 335
C
Canceling a copy................................................116
Canceling a fax................................................... 218
Canceling a Transmission................................... 207
Cleaning............................................. 379, 380, 382
Community........................................................... 350
Confidential document........................................102
Configuration page. 279, 280, 316, 317, 362, 371
Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Ethernet............................................................................ 445
Installing the driver.......................................................... 443
USB.................................................................................. 445
Wireless LAN.................................................................. 449
Configuring the machine
Printing the configuration page................ 279, 316, 371
Using Smart Organizing Monitor.................................. 368
Using the control panel...................................................235
Confirming information
Printer driver settings.......................................................... 96
Status information............................................................368
Consumables....................................................... 471
Control panel......................................................... 22
Control Panel......................................................... 24
Copier features........................................... 239, 287
Copier mode screen........................................... 112
Copy
2-sided copy........................................................ 121, 126
Basic operation............................................................... 114
Combine............................................................... 121, 126
Copying onto envelopes................................................... 61
Enlarge............................................................................. 118
ID Card copy...................................................................131
Reduce............................................................................. 118
Scan settings.................................................................... 135
Specifications.................................................................. 468
Copy key................................................................ 39
Counter information............................................ 333
Cover sheet.......................................................... 222
D
Date and time settings......................................... 365
Date setting.......................................................... 365
Default settings.................................................... 363
Density..................................................................188
Disclaimer.............................................................. 15
DNS setting.......................................................... 348
Duplex.................................................................. 334
E
E-mail notification 1............................................ 349
E-mail notification 2............................................ 349
Encryption............................................................ 457
Encryption key exchange.......................... 459, 460
Energy saver mode.................................... 366, 478
Entering characters......................................... 46, 49
Error messages.................................................... 387
Exposure glass.....................................................382
Extending tray 1.................................................... 59
Exterior................................................................... 19
F
Fax
Fax setting workflows..................................................... 194
LAN-Fax...........................................................................217
Lists/Reports.................................................................... 234
485
Receiving a fax................................................................ 223
Registering destinations.................................................. 198
Sending a fax.................................................................. 203
Specifications.................................................................. 469
Fax destinations.........................198, 200, 201, 344
Fax features......................................................... 247
Fax journal.................................................. 280, 317
Fax mode screen................................................. 196
Fax Number Confirmation..................................339
Fax only mode..................................................... 226
Fax printing.......................................................... 230
Fax Received File Processing............................. 339
Fax Speed Dial destination list.................. 280, 317
Fax TX/RX standby file list.................................. 362
FAX/TAD mode.................................................. 227
FAX/TEL Auto mode........................................... 226
FAX/TEL manual mode.......................................225
Forwarding..................................................227, 228
Function priority..................................................... 39
G
General status..................................................... 346
I
I/O timeout..........................................................342
IKE settings........................................................... 358
Image density............................................. 135, 215
Immediate transmission....................................... 203
Installing Smart Organizing Monitor
Installing Smart Organizing Monitor.............................444
Interior.................................................................... 21
Introduction............................................................ 14
IPsec global settings............................................ 358
IPsec policy settings.............................................358
IPsec settings........................................................ 358
IPsec transmission................................................ 457
IPv6 configuration............................................... 347
IPv6 environment................................................. 347
J
Job cancel............................................................ 100
L
LAN-Fax............................................................... 217
Language............................................................. 331
486
Lists............................ 234, 279, 280, 316, 317, 362
Loading paper....................................................... 56
Locked Print.......................................................... 103
M
Machine information...........................................334
Machine settings................................................. 369
Maintaining the machine
Cleaning the machine.................... 379, 380, 382, 383
Replacing the print cartridge.......................................... 375
Maintenance page............................ 280, 317, 362
mDNS setting....................................................... 347
Memory transmission.......................................... 203
Menu chart.......................................................... 237
Model-specific information...................................14
Moving................................................................. 384
Multi-access........................................................... 40
N
Network application........................................... 347
Network print setting........................................... 347
Network settings................................ 282, 319, 346
Network status..................................................... 346
Network Wizard................................................. 323
Non-recommended paper................................... 84
Notes.................................................................... 464
O
On hook dial....................................................... 212
Operation modes.................................................. 39
Operation Tools.....................................................42
Option settings....................................................... 94
Original.................................................................. 90
Original type....................................................... 136
P
Page counter........................................................333
Paper Feed Unit TK1220............................. 26, 470
Paper jam.................................. 405, 407, 409, 414
Paper mismatch..................................................... 99
Paper recommendations....................................... 90
Paper size...............................................................64
Paper Storage........................................................85
Paper tray............................................................ 332
Paper types............................................................ 77
Bond Paper.........................................................................77
Cardstock........................................................................... 77
Color Paper........................................................................ 77
Envelope............................................................................. 77
Label Paper........................................................................ 77
Letterhead........................................................................... 77
Plain Paper......................................................................... 77
Preprinted Paper................................................................ 77
Prepunched Paper............................................................. 77
Recycled Paper.................................................................. 77
Thick Paper 1..................................................................... 77
Thick Paper 2..................................................................... 77
Thin Paper...........................................................................77
PCL6..................................................................... 367
Placing originals.................................................... 89
POP3 settings.......................................................352
Print
Basic operation.................................................................. 98
Combine............................................................................. 93
Duplex................................................................................ 93
Printing on envelopes........................................................ 61
Specifications.................................................................. 467
Print area................................................................ 85
Print cartridge..............................................375, 471
Print counter......................................................... 333
Print functions....................................................... 108
Print output functions........................................... 109
Print quality functions.......................................... 108
Printer features............................................ 262, 299
Priority tray........................................................... 341
Q
Quick Dial destination list.......................... 280, 317
R
Reception mode.................................................. 223
Redial function..................................................... 211
Registering information....................................... 310
Destinations.......................................................... 142, 198
E-mail address................................................................. 160
Fax number...................................................................... 271
Folder............................................................................... 150
FTP server......................................................................... 165
Reports................................................ 279, 316, 362
Resend key...........................................................169
Reset settings........................................................ 363
Resolution.................................................... 190, 215
Restore settings.................................................... 365
S
SA (Security Association)................................... 458
Scan
Registering destinations.................................................. 142
SANE............................................................................... 186
Scan settings.................................................................... 187
Scan to E-mail................................................................. 160
Scan to Folder................................................................. 150
Scan to FTP...................................................................... 165
Scan to USB.....................................................................170
Scanning from Smart Organizing Monitor................... 175
TWAIN.............................................................................179
WIA.................................................................................. 182
Scan destinations...................... 142, 148, 169, 344
Scan size.............................................................. 187
Scan to E-mail............................................. 142, 160
Scan to Folder..................................................... 142
Scan to FTP..................................................142, 165
Scanner destination list...................... 280, 317, 362
Scanner feature.......................................... 244, 292
Scanner function..................................................468
Scanner journal.......................................... 280, 317
Scanner mode screen......................................... 140
Scanner Send Setting..........................................347
Select paper........................................................ 338
Select Paper Tray................................................ 338
Sending a fax...................................................... 204
Set date................................................................ 365
Set time.................................................................365
Shortcut to function................................................ 44
Smart Organizing Monitor................................. 368
SMTP settings....................................................... 351
SNMP settings..................................................... 350
Sound volume adjustment...................................335
Special senders................................................... 231
Specifications............................ 465, 467, 468, 469
Specifying a custom paper size........................... 70
Specifying the paper type and paper size.. 69, 71,
72
Speed Dial......................................... 200, 201, 210
Standby file list............................................ 280, 317
Status information................................................ 332
487
Status messages.......................................... 387, 402
Supported paper................................................... 74
System.................................................................. 350
System information..................................... 332, 368
System settings................................... 256, 294, 335
T
TCP/IP status....................................................... 346
Time setting.......................................................... 365
Toner.................................................................... 332
Toner saving........................................................ 341
Top page............................................................. 330
Trademarks.......................................................... 481
Transmission mode.............................................. 203
Trap...................................................................... 350
Tray 1..................................................................... 56
Tray 2................................................................... 336
Tray paper settings............................ 266, 304, 335
Troubleshooting................................. 429, 431, 432
Error and status messages appear on Smart Organizing
Monitor............................................................................ 402
Error and status messages on the screen...................... 387
Other problems................... 416, 417, 420, 423, 439
TWAIN scanning.................................................179
W
Web Image Monitor........................................... 329
What you can do with this machine
Copier function................................................................ 111
Fax function..................................................................... 193
Printer function.................................................................... 93
Scanner function............................................................. 139
Wireless LAN settings.................................352, 370
Wireless settings.................................................. 352
488
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M0C4-8504B
© 2018
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M0C4-8504B
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement